1
Adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mirrors, and steering column.
2
Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.
3
Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior features for a comfortable driving experience.
4
Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-yourself maintenance, and maintenance information.
5
What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire, or is involved in an accident.
6
Detailed vehicle information.
7
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners and seat belt instructions for Canadian owners
Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual.
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
1
1-1. Key information ........................... 20
Keys ...................................................... 20
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk .................. 22
Smart access system with push-button start .......................... 22
Wireless remote control.............. 34
Doors.................................................... 37
Trunk...................................................... 41
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof .......... 64
Power windows................................ 64
Moon roof .......................................... 66
1-5. Refueling........................................ 69
Opening the fuel tank cap........... 69
1-6. Theft deterrent system............... 72
Engine immobilizer system......... 72
Alarm.................................................... 74
(U.S.A.)............................................. 76
(seats, mirrors, steering wheel).......................... 44
Front seats.......................................... 44
Driving position memory ............. 46
Seat position memory ................... 49
Head restraints.................................. 51
Seat belts ............................................ 52
(manually adjustable type) ...... 58
(power-adjustable type)............ 59
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror ................................................ 60
Outside rear view mirrors............ 61
1-7. Safety information....................... 77
Correct driving posture ............... 77
SRS airbags ....................................... 79
Front passenger occupant classification system.................... 90
Child restraint systems ................. 95
Installing child restraints............... 98
2
2-1. Driving procedures................... 108
Driving the vehicle........................ 108
Engine (ignition) switch ................ 117
Automatic Transmission ............ 122
Manual Transmission................... 126
Turn signal lever............................. 128
Parking brake ................................. 129
2
2-2. Instrument cluster..................... 130
Gauges and meters ..................... 130
Indicators and warning lights ... 136
Multi-information display........... 139
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers.................... 143
Headlight switch............................ 143
Fog light switch .............................. 146
Windshield wipers and washer............................................. 147
Headlight cleaner switch ............. 151
2-4. Using other driving systems.... 152
Cruise control ................................ 152
Dynamic radar cruise control............................................. 155
Intuitive parking assist ................. 164
Driving assist systems.................. 170
PCS (Pre-Collision System)..... 176
2-5. Driving information................... 179
Cargo and luggage...................... 179
Vehicle load limits......................... 182
Winter driving tips ........................ 183
Trailer towing.................................. 187
(vehicles with an automatic transmission) .......... 188
(vehicles with a manual transmission)................ 189
3
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger............. 192
Automatic air conditioning system .................. 192
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers ........... 200
1
2
3-2. Using the audio system............ 201
Audio system type ........................ 201
Using the radio.............................. 204
Using the CD player...................... 211
WMA discs.................................... 217
Optimal use of the audio system ............................................ 225
Using the AUX adapter............ 228
Using the steering wheel audio switches............................ 229
3
4
5
3-3. Using the interior lights........... 231
Interior lights list............................. 231
• Interior lights ............................... 234
• Personal lights ............................ 234
6
7
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
3-4. Using the storage features .... 236
List of storage features............... 236
• Glove box..................................... 236
• Console boxes ........................... 237
• Overhead console................... 238
• Cup holders................................. 239
• Bottle holders/ door pockets................................ 241
3-5. Other interior features........... 242
Sun visors......................................... 242
Vanity mirror.................................. 243
Clock................................................. 244
Satellite switches .......................... 245
Ashtrays .......................................... 248
Cigarette lighter........................... 249
Power outlet.................................. 250
Seat heaters..................................... 251
Seat heaters and ventilators .... 253
Armrest ............................................ 255
Rear sunshade............................... 256
Trunk storage extension........... 258
Coat hooks ..................................... 259
Floor mat......................................... 260
Trunk features................................. 261
Garage door opener.................. 264
Compass.......................................... 269
4
4-1. Maintenance and care............ 274
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior................... 274
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior.................... 277
4-2. Maintenance............................. 280
Maintenance requirements .... 280
General maintenance................ 282
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs ..................................... 285
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance............................ 286
Do-it-yourself service precautions.................................. 286
Hood................................................. 289
Positioning a floor jack.............. 290
Engine compartment.................. 292
Tires .................................................. 306
Tire inflation pressure.................. 316
Wheels............................................. 320
Air conditioning filter.................. 322
Electronic key battery................ 325
Checking and replacing fuses................................................ 327
Headlight aim.................................. 341
Light bulbs....................................... 342
4
5
6
5-1. Essential information .............. 350
If your vehicle needs to be towed ...................................... 350
If you think something is wrong......................................... 356
Fuel pump shut off system ........ 357
Event data recorder................... 358
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency .............................. 360
If a warning message is displayed....................................... 369
If you have a flat tire.................... 382
If the engine will not start ........... 391
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P.............................. 392
If you lose your keys.................... 393
If the electronic key does not operate properly ....................... 394
If the vehicle battery is discharged ................................... 397
If your vehicle overheats .......... 400
If the vehicle becomes stuck ... 402
6-1. Specifications............................ 406
(fuel, oil level, etc.)..................... 406
Fuel information............................. 421
Tire information ............................ 424
1
2
6-2. Customization .......................... 436
Customizable features .............. 436
3
6-3. Initialization ................................ 441
Items to initialize ............................ 441
4
7
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners........................... 444
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners
(in French).................................... 445
5
6
Abbreviation list .................................. 448
7
Alphabetical index.............................. 450
What to do if... ...................................... 462
5
6
Pictorial index
Parking lights
Hood
Windshield wipers
Moon roof
Outside rear view mirrors
Side marker lights
Headlights (low and high
beam)
Fog lights
Turn signal lights
Headlights (high beam)
Doors
Rear window defogger
Side marker lights
Tail lights
Trunk
Tires
● Rotation
●
Replacement
● Inflation pressure
● Information
Turn signal lights
Fuel filler door
: If equipped
7
Pictorial index
Seat belts
Head restraints
Power window switches
A
AUX adapter
Bottle holders/door pockets
Floor mat
SRS driver airbag
SRS knee airbags
SRS front passenger airbag
8
Armrest
Console box
Cup holders
Ashtrays
Power outlet
Front seats
Cup holders
SRS side airbags
Console box
A
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Personal lights
Moon roof switch
Interior lights
Personal lights
Interior lights
Coat hooks
SRS curtain shield airbags
Vanity mirrors
Sun visors
Garage door opener switches
Compass
: If equipped
9
10
Pictorial index
B
Driving position memory switches
Seat position memory switches
Door lock switch
Outside rear view mirror switches
Window lock switch
Power window switches
C
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission shift lever
Seat heater switches
Seat heater/ventilator switches
Shift lock override button
Cigarette lighter
Ashtrays
Manual transmission
Manual transmission shift lever
Parking brake lever
Cigarette lighter
Ashtrays
Seat heater switches
Seat heater/ventilator switches
: If equipped
11
Pictorial index
Headlight switch
Turn signal lever
Fog light switch
Shift paddle switches
Gauges and meters
Multi-information display
Windshield wipers and washer switch
Engine (ignition) switch
12
Trunk opener main switch
Glove box
Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever
Tilt and telescopic steering control switch
Parking brake pedal (automatic transmission)
Audio remote control switches
A
Without navigation system
Air conditioning system
Audio system
Clock
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
Security indicator
Emergency flashers
With navigation system
Navigation system
*
Clock
Audio system
*
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
*
Security indicator
Air conditioning system
*
Emergency flashers
: If equipped
*
: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
13
14
Pictorial index
B
Without navigation system
“DISP” switch
With navigation system
Telephone switch
*
“DISP” switch
Distance switch
Distance switch
Cruise control switch
Cruise control switch
Talk switch
*
C
Automatic transmission
TRAC/VSC OFF switch
Manual transmission
TRAC/VSC OFF switch
ECT switch
ETCS switch
D
Rear sunshade switch
Headlight cleaner switch
Instrument panel light control dial
Satellite switches
Trunk opener
Fuel filler door opener
: If equipped
*
: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
15
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustration may differ from your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your
Lexus vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification with non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.
As the installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as the multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, cruise control system, anti-lock brake system, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation.
16
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.
CAUTION
■
General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that will hurt or kill you, your occupants or others.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others.
■
General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the cigarette lighter, the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
17
CAUTION
This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Lexus and its equipment.
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”,
“Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen.”
Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices.
Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g.
a lid opens).
18
1
1-1. Key information ............... 20
Keys.............................................. 20
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk........................ 22
Smart access system with push-button start.................... 22
Wireless remote control......... 34
Doors ............................................ 37
Trunk .............................................. 41
Outside rear view mirrors........ 61
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof....................... 64
Power windows.......................... 64
Moon roof ................................... 66
1-5. Refueling .......................... 69
Opening the fuel tank cap ..... 69
(seats, mirrors, steering wheel).............. 44
Front seats................................... 44
Driving position memory........ 46
Seat position memory.............. 49
Head restraints........................... 51
Seat belts ..................................... 52
Steering wheel (manually adjustable type) ..................... 58
Steering wheel (poweradjustable type) ...................... 59
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror......................................... 60
1-6. Theft deterrent system .... 72
Engine immobilizer system........................................ 72
Alarm............................................. 74
(U.S.A.)....................................... 76
1-7. Safety information............ 77
Correct driving posture ......... 77
SRS airbags ................................ 79
Front passenger occupant classification system.............. 90
Child restraint systems ........... 95
Installing child restraints......... 98
19
1-1. Key information
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Electronic keys
• Operating the smart access system with push-button start
(
• Operating the wireless remote control function
(
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
Take out the mechanical key.
The mechanical key can only be inserted in one direction, as the key only has grooves on one side. If the key cannot be inserted in a lock cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt to insert it.
After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key battery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you will need the mechanical key.
20
1-1. Key information
■
When required to leave a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant
Turn the trunk opener main switch off and lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (
Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only.
■
Key number plate
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the event that a mechanical key is lost, a new key can be made at your Lexus dealer using the key number plate. (
1
NOTICE
■
To prevent key damage
●
Do not subject the keys to strong shocks, expose them to high temperatures by placing them in direct sunlight, or get them wet.
●
Do not expose the keys to electromagnetic materials or attach any material that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.
●
Do not disassemble the electronic key.
21
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket.
(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)
Locks and unlocks the doors (
Unlocks the trunk (
Starts the engine (
22
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Press the lock button to lock the door.
1
Grip the handle to unlock the door.
Make sure to touch the sensor on the back of the handle.
The door cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the door is locked.
Press the button to unlock the trunk.
23
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■
Antennas outside cabin
Antennas inside cabin
Antenna inside trunk
Antenna outside trunk
24
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■
When locking or unlocking the doors
The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (70 cm) of either of the outside front door handles. (Only the doors detecting the key can be operated.)
When unlocking the trunk
The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (70 cm) of the trunk release button.
When starting the engine or changing “ENGINE
START STOP” switch modes
The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle.
1
25
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■
Operation signals
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
■
Conditions affecting operation
The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start from operating properly:
(Ways of coping:
●
When the electronic key battery is depleted
●
Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
●
When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication devices
●
When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
●
When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity
●
When another wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby
●
When carrying or using the electronic key together with the following devices that emit radio waves
• Another vehicle's electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves
• Personal computer or personal digital assistant (PDA)
• Digital audio player
• Portable game system
●
If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window
26
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■
Switching the door unlock function
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks.
STEP 1
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
STEP 2
When the indicator on the key surface is turned off, push and hold , , or for approximately 5 seconds while pushing on the key.
The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds, and repeat step 2.)
Multi-information display
Unlocking doors Beep
Hold the driver's door handle to unlock only the driver's door.
Exterior: Beeps three times
Interior: Pings once
Hold the front passenger’s door handle to unlock all doors
Hold either front door handle to unlock all doors
Exterior: Beeps twice
Interior: Pings once
STEP 3
Unlock the doors using the electronic key and open one of the doors.
If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (
1
27
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■
Battery-saving function
In the following circumstances, the entry function is disabled in order to prevent the vehicle and electronic key batteries from discharging.
●
When the entry function has not been used for a month or more
●
When the electronic key has been left within approximately 3 ft. (1 m) of the vehicle for 10 minutes or more
The system will resume operation when...
●
The vehicle is locked using the door handle lock switch.
●
The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control function.
(
●
The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the mechanical key. (
■
Electronic key battery depletion
●
The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The battery becomes depleted even if the electronic key is not used.) If the smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control function does not operate, or the detection area becomes smaller, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (
●
To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field.
• TVs
• Personal computers
• Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
• Glass top ranges
• Table lamps
■
To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention may not function.)
28
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■
Note for the entry function
●
Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases.
• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.
• The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the rear bumper center when the trunk is unlocked.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or floor, or in the glove box when the engine is started or “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes are changed.
●
As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or unlocked by anyone.
●
Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the engine if the electronic key is near the window.
●
The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash. (The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)
●
Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
●
If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)
●
A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle operation may prevent the doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.
■
When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle.
■
Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the anti-theft system automatically locks the vehicle again.
1
29
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■
Alarms and warning indicators
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warnings displayed on the multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehicle and unforeseeable accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures in response to any warning indications on the multi-information display. (
The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when only alarms are sounded.
Alarm
Exterior alarm sounds once for 2 seconds
Exterior alarm sounds once for 60 seconds
Exterior alarm sounds once for 10 seconds
Interior alarm sounds continuously
*
Situation
Tried to lock the doors using the entry function while the electronic key is still inside the passenger compartment
Closed the trunk while the electronic key is still inside and all doors are locked
Tried to exit the vehicle with the electronic key and lock the doors without first turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF
Tried to lock the vehicle using the entry function while a door is open
Tried to open the door and exit the vehicle without shifting the shift lever to P
Correction procedure
Retrieve the electronic key from the passenger compartment and lock the doors again.
Retrieve the electronic key from the trunk and close the trunk lid.
Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF and lock the doors again.
Close all of the doors and lock the doors again.
Shift the shift lever to P.
30
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Interior alarm pings continuously
Switched to ACCESSORY mode while the driver's door is open (Opened the driver's door when the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is in
ACCESSORY mode.)
Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF and close the driver's door.
Turned the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF while the driver's door is open
Close the driver's door.
*:
Vehicles with an automatic transmission only
■
If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly
●
Locking and unlocking the doors and trunk: Use the mechanical key.
(
●
Starting the engine:
■
When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
■
Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
It is possible to deactivate systems such as the smart access system with push-button start. (Customizable features
■
Certification for the smart access system with push-button start
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMLF-1
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
1
31
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
●
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
●
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
●
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
●
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
32
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■
Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
●
People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away from the smart access system antennas. (
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Lexus dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function.
●
User of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details for disabling the entry function.
1
33
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle and the trunk from outside the vehicle.
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
Opens the windows and moon roof (push and hold)
Unlocks the trunk
(push and hold)
Sounds alarm
(push and hold) (
■
2-step unlocking function
When you push , the driver's door is unlocked. Pushing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.
■
Operation signals
Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked.
Windows and moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and moon roof are operating.
■
Door lock buzzer
If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds if an attempt to lock the door is made.
Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.
■
Alarm
Using the wireless remote control to lock the door will set the alarm system.
■
Electronic key battery depletion
■
Security feature
34
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■
When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
■
Conditions affecting operation
■
Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. trunk unlocking function) can be changed. (Customizable features
■
Certification for wireless remote control
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
1
FCC ID: NI4TMLF-1
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
●
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
●
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
●
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
●
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
35
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
36
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless remote control or door lock switch.
■
■
■
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
1
■
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handle even if the lock buttons are in the lock position.
37
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
The door cannot be locked if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.
Depending on the position of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.
The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the locks are set.
These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push down on each rear door switch to lock both rear doors.
The following functions can be set or cancelled:
Function
Shift position linked door locking function
*
Shift position linked door unlocking function
*
Speed linked door locking function
Operation
Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all doors.
Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all doors.
All doors are locked when the vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
Driver's door linked door unlocking function
All doors are unlocked when the driver's door is opened within 10 seconds after turning the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
38
*
: Vehicles with an automatic transmission only
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■
To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure below:
STEP 1
STEP 2
Close all the doors and switch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode. (Perform the step 2 within 10 seconds.)
Shift the shift lever to P or N, and press and hold the driver's door lock switch (
or
) for approximately 5 seconds and then release.
The shift lever and switch positions corresponding to the desired function to be set or canceled are shown as follows.
1
Function
Shift position linked door locking function
Shift position linked door unlocking function
Speed linked door locking function
Driver's door linked door unlocking function
Shift lever position
P
N
Switch position
When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are locked and then unlocked.
39
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■
Impact detection door lock release system
In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked.
Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system may not operate.
■
Using the mechanical key
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (
■
Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed. (Customizable features
CAUTION
■
To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in death or serious injury.
●
Always use a seat belt.
●
Always lock all doors.
●
Ensure that all doors are properly closed.
●
Do not pull the inside handle of the front door while driving.
●
Set the rear door child protector locks when children are seated in the rear seat.
40
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener, entry function or wireless remote control.
■
Release the trunk lid.
1
■
■
Turn the main switch in the glove box off to disable the trunk opener.
On
Off
The trunk lid cannot be opened even with the wireless remote control or the entry function.
41
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■
Trunk light
When the trunk light switch is set to on, the trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened.
On
Off
■
Trunk handle
Use the trunk handle when closing the trunk.
■
Internal trunk release lever
The trunk lid can be opened by pulling down on the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the inside of trunk lid.
The lever will continue to glow for some time after the trunk lid is closed.
■
Using the mechanical key
The trunk can be also opened using the mechanical key. (
42
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■
Caution while driving
Keep the trunk lid closed.
This not only keeps personal belongings from being thrown out, but also prevents exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
■
When children are in the vehicle
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle as they may lock themselves in the vehicle or trunk, which could cause the child to overheat or suffocate, resulting in death or serious injury.
1
43
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Manual seat
44
Seat position lever
Seatback angle lever
Vertical height adjustment lever
Seat cushion (front) angle knob
Power seat
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Seat position switch
Seatback angle switch
Seat cushion (front) angle switch
Vertical height adjustment switch
Lumbar support switch
CAUTION
■
Seat adjustment
●
Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
●
Manual seat only: After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position.
45
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver's seat, steering wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be memorized and recalled with the touch of a button. It is also possible to set this function to activate automatically when the doors are unlocked.
Three different driving positions can be entered into memory.
■
Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Vehicles with a manual transmission: Check that the parking brake is set.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
Switch to IGNITION ON mode.
Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear view mirrors to the desired positions.
While pushing the “SET” button, push button “1”, “2” or “3” until the signal beeps.
If the selected button has already been preset, the previously recorded position will be overwritten.
46
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■
Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Vehicles with a manual transmission: Check that the parking brake is set.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Switch to IGNITION ON mode.
Push button “1”, “2” or “3” to recall the memorized position.
1
Record your driving position to button “1”, “2” or “3” before performing the following.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and close the driver's door.
While the desired button (“1”, “2” or “3”) press on the wireless remote control until the signal beeps.
The driving position is recalled when the driver's door is unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control and the driver’s door is opened.
47
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
STEP 3
Open one of the doors
If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.
In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm.
(
■
Canceling the linked door unlock operation
STEP 1
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and close the driver's door.
STEP 2
While pushing the “SET” button, push trol until the signal beeps. on the wireless remote con-
■
Operating the driving position memory after turning the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF
Memorized positions (except for the steering wheel positions) can be activated up to 30 seconds after the driver's door is opened, even after turning the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch OFF.
■
To cancel seat position recall
Perform any of the following operations.
●
Push the “SET” button.
●
Push button “1”, “2” or “3”.
●
Adjust the seat using the switches (only cancels seat position recall).
■
If the battery is disconnected
The memorized positions are erased when the battery is disconnected.
CAUTION
■
Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.
48
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Your preferred front passenger seat position can be memorized and recalled with the touch of a button.
Three different seat positions can be entered into memory.
■
Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Vehicles with a manual transmission: Check that the parking brake is set.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
Switch to IGNITION ON mode.
Adjust the front passenger seat to the desired position.
While pushing the “SET” button, push button “1”, “2” or “3” until the signal beeps.
If the selected button has already been preset, the previously recorded position will be overwritten.
■
Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Vehicles with a manual transmission: Check that the parking brake is set.
Push button “1”, “2” or “3” to recall the memorized position.
1
49
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■
Operating the seat position memory after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF
Memorized position can be activated up to 30 seconds after the front passenger door is opened, even after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
■
To cancel seat position recall
Perform any of the following operations.
●
Push the “SET” button.
●
Push button “1”, “2” or “3”.
●
Adjust the seat position using the switches.
■
If the battery is disconnected
The memorized positions are erased when the battery is disconnected.
CAUTION
■
Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear passenger.
50
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Lock release button
Vertical adjustment
Push and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint.
Removal
Pull the head restraint up while pushing the lock release button.
1
■
Adjusting the height of the head restraints
Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
■
Adjusting the rear seat head restraints
Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using.
CAUTION
■
Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●
Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
●
Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
●
Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
51
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle.
■
●
Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder.
●
Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.
●
Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat.
●
Do not twist the seat belt.
■
Fastening the belt
Push the tab into the buckle until a clicking sound is heard.
Releasing the belt
Press the release button.
Release button
52
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■
Down
Up
Move the height adjuster up and down as needed until you hear a click.
1
If the shoulder belt sits close to a person’s neck, slide the seat belt comfort guide forward.
The pretensioner helps the seat belt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seat belt when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal collision.
The pretensioner may not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a side impact or a rear impact.
53
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
When the pre-collision sensor detects an obstacle and determines that a collision is unavoidable, the seat belts lessen collision injury by retracting the slack in the front seat belts before the collision, thus restraining the driver and passenger at an earlier stage.
The seat belts will also operate in the event of sudden braking. (
■
Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can move around fully.
■
Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (
■
Pregnant women
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (
Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants. Extend the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and position the belt across the chest.
Avoid belt contact over the rounding of the abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only a pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision.
54
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■
People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way.
■
Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.
●
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child become large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (
●
When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt,
follow the instructions on P. 52 regarding seat belt usage.
■
Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
■
Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Lexus dealer free of charge.
1
55
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident.
Failing to do so may cause death or severe injury.
■
Wearing a seat belt
●
Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
●
Always wear a seat belt properly.
●
Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more than one person at once, including children.
●
Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
●
Do not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seating position. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats.
●
Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
●
Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
■
Seat belt pretensioners
●
Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat. Doing so will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passenger’s seat may not activate in the event of a collision.
●
If the pretensioner has activated, the seat belt becomes locked: it cannot be further extended, nor will it return to the stowed position. The seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer.
56
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■
Seat belt damage and wear
●
Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in the door.
●
Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts.
Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
●
Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus dealer.
●
Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there's no obvious damage.
●
Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts.
Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating properly resulting in death or serious injury.
■
Using a seat belt extender
●
Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender.
●
Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or injury in the event of a collision.
●
The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended.
1
NOTICE
■
When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
57
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.
STEP
STEP
STEP
1
2
3
Hold the steering wheel and press the lever down.
Adjust to the ideal position by moving the steering wheel horizontally and vertically.
Pull the lever up.
CAUTION
■
Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
■
After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an accident.
58
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position while the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
Up
Down
Away from the driver
Toward the driver
1
When the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned OFF, the steering wheel returns to its stowed position by moving up and away to enable easier driver entry and exit.
Switching to ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode will return the steering wheel to the original position.
CAUTION
■
Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
59
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
In “AUTO” mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of vehicles behind and automatically reduce the reflected light.
Turns “AUTO” mode on/off
The indicator comes on when
“AUTO” mode is turned on.
The anti-glare mirror default mode is “AUTO”. The anti-glare mirror is automatically set to
“AUTO” whenever the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned on.
■
To prevent sensor error
To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover them.
CAUTION
■
Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
60
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch when the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
Select a mirror to adjust
(“L”: left or “R”: right)
Adjust the mirror up, down, in, or out using the switch
1
■
When the mirrors are fogged up
Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (
■
Folding back the mirrors
Push back in the direction of the vehicle's rear.
■
One-touch adjustment of the mirror angle
(vehicles with driving position memory)
A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and adjusted with the touch of a button. (
61
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■
Linked mirror function when reversing (vehicles with driving position memory)
The outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle is reversing in order to give a better view of the ground. However, this function will not operate when the mirror select switch is in the neutral position (between “L” and
“R”).
■
Auto anti-glare function (vehicles with sports or luxury package)
When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to “AUTO” mode, the outside rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. (
■
Rain clearing mirrors
When water droplets collects on the mirror surface, for example when it rains, the rain clearing (hydrophilic) effect of the mirrors causes the droplets to be spread out into a film making the rear view clearer.In the following cases, the rain clearing effect will be reduced temporarily, but will return after 1 or 2 days' exposure to direct sunlight.
●
After wiping dirt off the mirrors
●
When the mirrors fog up
●
After waxing your vehicle in an automatic car wash
●
After your vehicle has been parked for a long period in underground parking lots, etc. where there is no direct sunlight.
62
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■
When driving the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
●
Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
●
Do not drive with the mirrors folded back.
●
Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving.
■
When the mirror defoggers are operating
Do not touch the surface of the mirror, as it may be hot.
1
NOTICE
■
If the mirrors become iced up
In order to retain the rain-clearing properties of the mirror, do not attempt to scrape the ice off. Instead, remove it by turning on the mirror defoggers or by applying warm water.
63
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
The power windows can be opened and closed using the following switches.
Closing
One-touch closing
*
Opening
One-touch opening
*
*
: Pushing the switch in the opposite direction will stop window travel partway.
Press the switch down to lock passenger window switches.
Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.
■
The power windows can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■
Door lock linked window operation
●
The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.
(
●
The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control. (
64
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■
Operating the power windows after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
OFF
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned
OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■
Jam protection function
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■
When the battery is disconnected
The power windows must be initialized in order to ensure proper operation. (Perform for each window with the switch for each seat.)
STEP 1
Open the window halfway.
STEP 2
Fully close the window by pulling the switch up and continue holding the switch for one second.
The indicator on the switch changes from a flashing pattern to being on when initial settings are complete.
■
Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. (Customizable features
1
CAUTION
■
Closing the windows
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●
Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
●
Do not allow children to operate the power windows.
Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some instances, even death.
■
Jam protection function
●
Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally.
●
The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window fully closes.
65
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up and down.
■
Fully open
Fully close
The moon roof can be opened in 7 steps by changing the position of the switch.
■
■
Open to step 6
While the moon roof is opening, pushing the switch will stop the moon roof operation partway.
Any further opening must be performed manually, using the switch.
After the operation stops, press the switch again to fully close the moon roof.
Tilt up
Tilt down
Fully up/fully down.
66
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■
The moon roof can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■
Door lock linked moon roof operation
●
The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. (
●
The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control. (
■
Operating the moon roof after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned
OFF. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■
Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
■
If the moon roof can not be closed
Pressing the switch of at for more than 10 seconds closes the moon roof.
■
To reduce moon roof wind noise
●
Drive with the moon roof switch in roof manually. when you open and close the moon
●
Drive with the moon roof where it has stopped when opening automatically.
■
Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
■
Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. (Customizable features
1
67
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
CAUTION
■
Opening the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●
Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is moving.
●
Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■
Closing the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●
Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bodies in a position where they could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.
●
Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.
■
Jam protection function
●
Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally.
●
The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof fully closes.
68
1-5. Refueling
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.
■
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and ensure that all the doors and windows are closed.
■
STEP 1
Open the fuel filler door.
1
STEP 2
STEP 3
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to open.
Hang the fuel tank cap on the back of the fuel filler door.
69
1-5. Refueling
When replacing the fuel tank cap, turn it until a clicking sound is heard.
After releasing your hand, the cap will turn slightly to the opposite direction.
■
Fuel types
Use unleaded gasoline. (91 Octane rating [Research Octane Number 96] or higher)
■
Fuel tank capacity (reference)
17.2 gal. (65 L, 14.3 Imp.gal.)
■
When the fuel filler door opener is inoperable
The lever can be used to open the fuel filler door if the fuel filler door cannot be opened using the inside switch because the battery is discharged or for any other reason.
70
1-5. Refueling
CAUTION
■
Refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so, may result in death or serious injury.
●
Touch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static electricity.
Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel vapors to ignite.
●
Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.
●
Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their bodies to come close to an open fuel tank.
●
Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
●
Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
●
Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.
■
When replacing the fuel cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle.
Failure to do so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.
1
NOTICE
■
Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Failing to do so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's painted surface.
71
1-6. Theft deterrent system
The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine from starting if the key has not been previously registered in the vehicle's on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The indicator light flashes after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch has been turned OFF to indicate that the system is operating.
■
System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type of engine immobilizer system.
■
Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
●
If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object
●
If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
■
Certifications for the engine immobilizer system
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-1
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
72
1-6. Theft deterrent system
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
1
NOTICE
■
To prevent damage to the key
Do not modify, remove or disable the engine immobilizer system. If any unauthorized changes or modifications are made, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
73
1-6. Theft deterrent system
The system sounds the alarm and flashes lights when forcible entry is detected.
■
The alarm is triggered in the following situations.
● A locked door or trunk is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the entry function, wireless remote door lock function or mechanical key with the alarm being set.
● The hood is opened with the alarm being set.
■
Close the doors, trunk and hood, and lock all doors using the entry function, wireless remote door lock function or mechanical key.
The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes from being on to flashing when the system is set.
■
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarm.
●
Unlock the doors or trunk using the entry function, wireless remote door lock function or mechanical key.
●
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)
74
1-6. Theft deterrent system
■
Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following.
●
Nobody is in the vehicle.
●
The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.
●
No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
■
Panic mode
When is pushed for longer than about one second, an alarm will sound for about 60 seconds and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, push any button on the wireless remote control.
■
Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations.
Stopping the alarm deactivates the system.
●
A person inside the vehicle opens a door, the trunk or hood.
●
The battery is recharged or replaced when the vehicle is locked.
■
When the battery is disconnected
Be sure to deactivate the alarm system.
If the battery is disconnected before deactivating the alarm system, the alarm may be triggered when the battery is reconnected.
1
75
1-6. Theft deterrent system
These labels are attached to the vehicle to reduce vehicle theft by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles. Do not remove under penalty of law.
76
1-7. Safety information
Drive in a good posture as follows:
Sit upright and well back in the seat. (
Adjust the position of the seat forward or backward to ensure the pedals can be reached and easily depressed to the extent required. (
Adjust the seatback so that the controls are easily operable.
Adjust the tilt and telescopic positions of the steering wheel downward so the airbag is facing your chest.
(
Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(
1
CAUTION
■
While driving
●
Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
77
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■
While driving
●
Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or serious injury to the driver or passenger.
●
Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident. The adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.
■
Adjusting the seat position:
●
Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat.
●
Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
78
1-7. Safety information
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
1
SRS front airbags
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components.
Knee airbags
Can help provide driver and front passenger protection.
SRS side and curtain shield airbags
SRS side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants.
SRS curtain shield airbags
Can help protect primarily the head of outside occupants.
79
1-7. Safety information
Knee airbags
Front passenger airbag
Curtain shield airbags
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator lights
Side airbags
Side and curtain shield airbag sensors
Curtain shield airbag sensors
SRS warning light
Driver airbag
Driver's seat belt buckle switch
Driver's seat position sensor
Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch
Airbag sensor assembly
Occupant detection system
(ECU and sensors)
Front airbag sensors
80
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag system controls airbag deployment power for the driver and front passenger. The driver airbag system consists of the driver seat’s position sensor etc. The front passenger’s airbag system consists of the front passenger occupant classification sensor etc.
The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and an airbag sensor.
1-7. Safety information
In certain types of severe frontal or side impacts, the SRS airbag system triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.
1
■
SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, driver's seat position sensor, driver's seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power sources.
(
■
If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
●
Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating)
SRS airbag.
●
A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
●
Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the front seats, and parts of the front pillar, rear pillar and roof side rail, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
●
The front windshield may crack.
■
Operating conditions (front airbags)
●
The SRS front airbags will deploy if the severity of the frontal impact is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an approximate 15 mph (25 km/h) collision when the vehicle impacts straight into a fixed barrier that does not move or deform.
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).
●
It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.
●
The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is fastened, even if the seat is unoccupied. (
81
1-7. Safety information
■
Operating conditions (side and curtain shield airbags)
●
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are designed to inflate when the passenger compartment is subjected to a severe impact from the side.
●
The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the side airbag on the passenger seat may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied.
(
■
Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision
The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
●
Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface
●
Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
●
Landing hard or vehicle falling
■
Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (front airbags)
The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.
●
Collision from the side
●
Collision from the rear
●
Vehicle rollover
82
1-7. Safety information
■
Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag
(side and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
●
Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment
●
Collision from the side at an angle
1
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.
●
Collision from the front
●
Collision from the rear
●
Vehicle rollover
83
1-7. Safety information
■
When to contact your Lexus dealer
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting your Lexus dealer.
●
Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
●
The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the
SRS airbags to inflate.
●
A portion of the doors is damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags to inflate.
●
The pad section of the steering wheel, front passenger airbag cover or lower portion of the instrument panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
●
The surface of the seats with the side airbag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
●
The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
84
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■
SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●
The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
●
The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:
Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.
1
85
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■
SRS airbag precautions
●
If the seat belt extender has been connected to the driver's seat belt buckle but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the driver's seat belt, the SRS driver's airbag system will judge that the driver is wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the driver's airbag may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.
●
The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
●
Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants and children.
(
86
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■
SRS airbag precautions
●
Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard.
1
●
Do not allow a child to stand in front of the
SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger.
●
Do not drive the vehicle while the driver or passenger have items resting on their knees.
●
Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pillars.
●
Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seat toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle.
87
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■
SRS airbag precautions
●
Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad or lower portion of the instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles when
SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy.
●
Do not attach anything to areas such as the door, windshield glass, side door glass, front and rear pillars, roof side rail or assist grip.
●
Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could become projectiles and seriously injure or kill you, should the SRS curtain shield airbag deploy.
●
If the vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploys, be sure to remove it.
●
Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags.
●
Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
●
Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
●
If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
●
If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front pillar garnish, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Lexus dealer.
88
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■
Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Lexus dealer.
The SRS airbag may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.
●
Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
●
Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails
●
Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant compartment
●
Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kangaroo bar etc.)
●
Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system
●
Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD players
●
Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability
1
89
1-7. Safety information
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for front passenger.
SRS warning light
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
90
1-7. Safety information
■
*1
Indicator/ warning light
Devices
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
“AIR BAG
ON”
Off
Flashing
*2
Activated
■
*3
*4
Indicator/ warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
SRS warning light
Devices
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
“AIR BAG
OFF”
*5
Off
Flashing
*2
Deactivated
Activated
Deactivated
Activated
1
91
1-7. Safety information
■
Indicator/ warning light
Devices
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Not illuminated
Off
Deactivated
Activated
Deactivated
■
Indicator/ warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
SRS warning light
Devices
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
“AIR BAG
OFF”
On
Off
Deactivated
Activated
Deactivated
Activated
*
1
: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/ her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
*
2
: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
*
3
: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
92
1-7. Safety information
*
4
: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (
*
5
: In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual as for installing the child restraint system properly. (
1
CAUTION
■
Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding front passenger occupant classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●
Wear the seat belt properly.
●
Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
●
Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the front passenger airbag, side airbag on the front passenger side and front passenger knee airbag may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of collision.
●
Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
●
Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs.
●
Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
●
Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.
93
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■
Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
●
If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remain illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.
●
When it is unavoidable to install the forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. (
●
Do not modify or remove the front seats.
●
Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.
●
Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seatbacks.
●
Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface.
●
Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
94
1-7. Safety information
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of child restraint systems.
1
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.
●
Choose a child restraint system appropriate to the age and size of the child.
●
For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according to the age and size of the child.
Infant seat
95
1-7. Safety information
Convertible seat
Booster seat
■
Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
Get an appropriate child restraint system for the child. If a child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the vehicle's seat belt.
(
CAUTION
■
Child restraint precautions
●
For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.
96
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■
Child restraint precautions
●
Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
●
Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
●
A forward-facing child restraint system should allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.
●
Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of collision.
●
Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front pillar, rear pillar or roof side rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
●
Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
■
When the child restraint system is not in use
●
Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use.
Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compartment.
●
If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
1
97
1-7. Safety information
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly secure child restraints to the rear seats using a seat belt or a child restraint lower anchorage. Attach the top strap when installing a child restraint.
Seat belts equipped with a child restraint locking mechanism (ALR/ELR belts except driver’s seat belt) (
Child restraint lower anchorages
Lower anchorages are provided for the outside rear seats.
(Buttons displaying the location of the anchorages are attached to the seats.)
Anchor bracket
(for top strap)
Anchor brackets are provided for all rear seats.
98
1-7. Safety information
■
STEP 1
Place the child seat on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle.
1
STEP 2
STEP 3
Run the seat belt through the child seat and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt and then allow it to retract slightly in order to activate the ALR lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to retract only.
99
1-7. Safety information
STEP 4
While pushing the child seat down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child seat is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.
■
STEP 1
Place the child seat on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.
STEP 2
STEP 3
Run the seat belt through the child seat and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder strap and then allow it to retract slightly into the ALR lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to retract only.
100
STEP 4
■
STEP 1
STEP 2
1-7. Safety information
While pushing the child seat into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child seat is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.
1
Place the booster seat on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.
Sit the child in the booster seat. Fit the seat belt to the booster seat according to the manufacturer's instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child's shoulder, and that the lap belt is as low as possible. (
101
1-7. Safety information
Push the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt.
Type A
STEP 1
STEP 2
Flip the cover.
Latch the hooks of the lower straps onto the anchorages.
If the child restraint has a top strap, the top strap should be latched onto the anchorages.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.
Canada only
102
1-7. Safety information
Type B
STEP 1
STEP 2
Flip the cover.
Latch the buckles onto the anchorages.
If the child restraint has a top strap, the top strap should be latched onto the anchorages.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.
1
Canada only
STEP 1
Secure the child restraint using a seat belt or a lower anchors, and lock the head restraint in place at the lowest position.
103
1-7. Safety information
STEP 2
Open the anchor bracket cover, latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top strap.
Make sure the top strap is securely latched.
■
Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
Anchorages conform to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used.
This vehicle is designed to confirm to the SAE J1819.
CAUTION
■
When installing a booster seat
Do not fully extend the shoulder belt to prevent the belt from going to ALR lock mode: (
●
ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only which could cause injury or discomfort to the child.
●
Do not allow the child to play with the seat belt or the child could be killed or serious injured.
104
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■
When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking or an accident.
●
If the driver’s seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the right-hand rear seat.
1
●
Only put a forward facing or booster child seat on the front seat when unavoidable.
When installing a forward facing or booster child seat on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).
●
When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
●
Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.
●
Push and pull the child seat in different directions to be sure it is secure.
●
Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.
105
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■
Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a collision.
■
To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchor
When using the lower anchor, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchorages and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
106
2
2-1. Driving procedures ....... 108
Driving the vehicle................. 108
Engine (ignition) switch.......... 117
Automatic Transmission........ 122
Manual Transmission.............. 126
Turn signal lever....................... 128
Parking brake........................... 129
2-2. Instrument cluster ......... 130
Gauges and meters................ 130
Indicators and warning lights ......................................... 136
Multi-information display...................................... 139
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers......... 143
Headlight switch...................... 143
Fog light switch ........................ 146
Windshield wipers and washer ..................................... 147
Headlight cleaner switch....... 151
2-4. Using other driving systems.......................... 152
Cruise control.......................... 152
Dynamic radar cruise control..................................... 155
Intuitive parking assist........... 164
Driving assist systems............ 170
(Pre-Collision System) ........ 176
2-5. Driving information........ 179
Cargo and luggage ................. 179
Vehicle load limits................... 182
Winter driving tips.................. 183
Trailer towing ........................... 187
Dinghy towing (vehicles with an automatic transmission) ......................... 188
Dinghy towing (vehicles with a manual transmission) ......................... 189
107
2-1. Driving procedures
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving.
■
■
Automatic transmission
STEP
STEP
1
2
With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.
(
Release the parking brake. (
STEP 3
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently push the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
Manual transmission
STEP
STEP
1
2
With the clutch pedal fully depressed, shift the shift lever into 1.
(
Release the parking brake. (
STEP 3
Gradually release the clutch pedal. At the same time, gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
■
Automatic transmission
STEP
STEP
1
2
With the shift lever in D, push the brake pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P or N. (
Manual transmission
STEP 1
With the clutch pedal fully depressed, push the brake pedal.
STEP 2
If necessary, set the parking brake.
When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever into N.
(
108
2-1. Driving procedures
■
Automatic transmission
STEP
STEP
STEP
STEP
1
2
3
4
With the shift lever in D, push the brake pedal.
Set the parking brake.
Shift the shift lever to P. (
(
Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch and stop the engine.
STEP 5
Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on your person.
Manual transmission
STEP
STEP
STEP
1
2
3
With the clutch pedal fully depressed, push the brake pedal.
Set the parking brake. (
Shift the shift lever into N. (
STEP
STEP
4
5
Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to stop the engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on your person.
2
Automatic transmission
STEP
STEP
STEP
1
2
3
Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to D.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.
Manual transmission
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
With the parking brake firmly set and the clutch pedal fully depressed, shift the shift lever into 1.
Lightly depress the accelerator pedal at the same time as gradually releasing the clutch pedal.
Release the parking brake.
109
2-1. Driving procedures
■
Driving in the rain
●
Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
●
Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery.
●
Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.
■
Breaking in your new Lexus
To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended to observe:
●
For the first 186 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
●
For the first 621 miles (1000 km):
• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive continuously in the low gears.
• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
■
Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding down.
■
Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (
■
Normal characteristics after turning off the engine
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is because fuel evaporation leakage check is performed. It does not indicate a malfunction.
110
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■
When starting the vehicle
With automatic transmission vehicles, always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
■
When driving the vehicle
●
Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly, allowing you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.
●
Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
●
With automatic transmission vehicles, do not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
●
If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check that the trunk is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
●
Do not under any circumstances shift the shift lever to P, R or N (automatic transmission vehicles) or R (manual transmission vehicles) while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can cause significant damage to the transmission system and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
●
Do not shift the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so may cause the engine brake to not operate properly and lead to an accident.
2
111
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
●
Do not turn the engine off while driving.
The power steering and brake booster system will not operate properly if the engine is not running.
●
Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (
●
When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing an accident.
●
Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents that may result in death or serious injury.
●
Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their bodies are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.
●
Do not drive the vehicle off-road.
This is not a AWD vehicle designed for real off-road driving. Proceed with all due caution if it becomes unavoidable to drive off-road.
●
Do not drive across river crossings or through other bodies of water.
This may cause electric/electronic components to short circuit, damage the engine or cause other serious damage to the vehicle.
●
Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.
■
When driving on slippery road surfaces
●
Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.
●
Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by up-shifting or down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.
●
After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in an accident.
112
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■
When shifting the shift lever
With automatic transmission vehicles, be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.
■
When the vehicle is stopped
●
Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P (vehicles with an automatic transmission only) or N the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, and may cause an accident.
●
Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
●
With automatic transmission vehicles, always keep a foot on the brake pedal while the engine is running to prevent an accident caused by the vehicle moving.
■
When the vehicle is parked
●
Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following.
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of eye glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical components.
●
Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P (vehicles with an automatic transmission only), stop the engine and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
●
Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
2
113
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
●
Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
■
Exhaust gases
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
●
If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
●
The exhaust should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer. Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in death or a serious health hazard.
■
When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.
■
When braking the vehicle
●
When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.
●
If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid downhills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but it will require more force on the pedal than usual. Braking distance may also increase.
●
Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.
114
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
●
The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: if one of the systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and braking distance becomes longer.
Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed immediately.
■
If the vehicle becomes stuck or bogged (AWD models)
Do not spin the wheels recklessly when any of the tires is up in the air, or stuck in sand or mud, etc. This may damage the drive system components or propel the vehicle forward (or in another direction) and cause an accident.
2
NOTICE
■
When driving the vehicle
●
With manual transmission vehicles, do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving.
Doing so may cause clutch trouble.
●
With manual transmission vehicles, do not use any gears other than the first gear when starting off and moving forward.
Doing so may damage the clutch.
●
With automatic transmission vehicles, do not use the accelerator pedal or depress accelerator and brake pedals together to hold the vehicle on a hill.
●
With manual transmission vehicles, do not use the clutch to hold the vehicle when stopping on an uphill grade.
■
When parking the vehicle
With automatic transmission vehicles, always put the shift lever in P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.
■
Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
●
Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for a long time.
Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
●
When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
115
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■
If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)
Have your Lexus dealer check and replace the brake pads as soon as possible.
The rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
Front brake only: Moderate levels of the brake pad and disc wear allow enhanced front braking power. As a result, the discs may wear more quickly than conventional brake discs. Therefore, when replacing the brake pads, Lexus recommends that you also have the thickness of the discs measured.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or that of the brake discs are exceeded.
■
If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
●
It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
●
The vehicle will make abnormal sounds.
●
The vehicle will behave abnormally.
Replace a flat tire with a new one. (
■
When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle.
●
Engine stalling
●
Short in electrical components
●
Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Lexus dealer check the following.
●
Brake function
●
Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transmission, differential, etc.
●
Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints (where possible) and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
116
2-1. Driving procedures
Modes can be switched by pressing the “ENGINE START STOP” switch when carrying the electronic key on your person. (The engine can be started in any mode by operating the switch at the same time as depressing the brake pedal or clutch pedal.)
■
Automatic transmission
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns green.
STEP 4
Press the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch.
2
117
2-1. Driving procedures
Manual transmission
STEP
STEP
STEP
1
2
3
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in N.
Firmly depress the clutch pedal.
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns green.
STEP 4
Press the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch.
118
2-1. Driving procedures
■
OFF*
Emergency flashers can be used.
ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used.
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns amber.
IGNITION ON mode
All electrical components can be used.
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns amber.
*
: The engine cannot be switched to OFF unless the shift lever is in
P.
2
119
2-1. Driving procedures
■
If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (
■
When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator flashes in amber
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
■
Auto power OFF function
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than an hour with the shift lever in P, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will automatically turn OFF.
■
Electronic key battery depletion
■
When the electronic key battery is fully discharged
■
Conditions affecting operation
■
Note for the entry function
CAUTION
■
When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not press the accelerator while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■
Stopping the engine in an emergency
If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, push and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for more than 3 seconds.
However, do not touch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while driving except in an emergency. If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead to an unexpected accident.
120
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode for long periods without the engine running.
■
When starting the engine
●
Do not race a cold engine.
●
If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine checked immediately.
2
121
2-1. Driving procedures
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
■
While the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever.
122
2-1. Driving procedures
■
Shift position
P
R
N
D
S
Function
Parking the vehicle or starting the engine
Reversing
Neutral
Normal driving
*
1
S mode driving
*
2
(
*
1
: To improve fuel consumption and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the D position for normal driving.
* 2
: Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the possible gear ranges, controls engine braking forces, and prevents unnecessary upshifting.
■
The following patterns can be selected to suit current driving and operating conditions.
Power mode
For powerful acceleration and driving in mountainous regions.
Normal mode
Snow mode
For accelerating and driving on slippery road surfaces, such as on snow.
Press “SNOW” to return to normal mode.
2
123
2-1. Driving procedures
Shift the shift lever to the S position and operate the shift lever or shift paddle switch.
Upshifting
Downshifting
124
The initial shift range in S mode is automatically set to 5 or 4 according to vehicle speed. However, the initial shift range may be set to 3 or 2 if the
AI-SHIFT has operated while the shift lever was in the D position.
(
■
Shift range
6
5
Function
Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 6 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 5 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
4
3
Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 4 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 3 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
2
Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 2 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
Setting the gear at 1.
1
A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking forces than a higher shift range.
2-1. Driving procedures
■
Gear position display when driving in S mode
The current gear is displayed on the multi-information display. (
■
Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer (in the S mode)
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the shift lever or shift paddle switch is operated. (The warning buzzer will sound twice.)
■
When driving with the cruise control system or dynamic radar cruise control system
The engine brake will not operate in the S mode, even when downshifting to 5 or 4.
(
■
Snow mode automatic deactivation
Snow mode is automatically deactivated if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off after driving in snow mode.
■
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
■
If does not come on even after shifting the shift lever to S
This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
(In this situation, the vehicle will operate as if the shift lever is in D.)
■
AI-SHIFT
The AI-SHIFT automatically shifts the gear to the optimal position according to the driver performance and driving conditions.
The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position. (Shifting the shift lever to the S position cancels the function.)
2
125
2-1. Driving procedures
■
Fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever, and then release it slowly.
■
Shift the shift lever into the R position while lifting up the ring section.
The snow mode is used for accelerating and driving on slippery road surfaces, such as on snow.
Push the switch once more to return to normal mode.
126
2-1. Driving procedures
■
Maximum downshifting speed
Adhere to the downshifting speeds in the following table in order to prevent overrevving the engine. mph (km/h)
Shift position Maximum speed
1
2
33 (54)
56 (90)
3
4
83 (134)
108 (172)
2
127
2-1. Driving procedures
Left turn
Right turn
Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change
The left hand signal will flash until you release the lever.
Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change
The right hand signal will flash until you release the lever.
■
Turn signals can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■
If the indicators flash faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.
128
2-1. Driving procedures
Automatic transmission
CANADA U.S.A.
Manual transmission
Sets the parking brake
*
(Depressing the pedal again releases the parking brake.)
*
: Fully depress the parking brake pedal with your left foot while depressing the brake pedal with your right foot.
Sets the parking brake
Fully set the parking brake while depressing the brake pedal.
Releases the parking brake
2
CANADA
U.S.A.
NOTICE
■
Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.
129
2-2. Instrument cluster
130
The units used on the speedometer and the tachometer gauge display may differ depending on the model/type.
The following gauges, meters and display illuminate when the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Multi-information display
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Tacho indicator
When the set engine speed is reached, this ring-shaped indicators comes on in yellow. The indicator comes on in red when the engine speed reaches a dangerous range.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
2-2. Instrument cluster
Odometer and trip meter
Odometer: Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter: Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters “A” and “B” can be used to record and display different distances independently.
Speed indicator
When the set speed is reached while driving, this ring-shaped indicator comes on in yellow. The indicator comes on in red when the vehicle speed reaches the dangerous range.
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button
Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pushing and holding the button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being displayed.
2
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
Darker
Brighter
131
2-2. Instrument cluster
■
STEP 1
Bring up the satellite switch mode on the multi-information display.
Press ton.
,
or the “ON/OFF” but-
STEP 2
STEP 3
Select the item whose setting is to be changed.
Press
or
to display the item whose setting is to be changed.
Change the settings.
Press “ON/OFF” button to change the settings (e.g. on/off).
132
2-2. Instrument cluster
■
The satellite switch can be used to change the set speed at which the yellow speed or tacho indicator ring comes on.
The setting can be made only when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the vehicle is stopped.
STEP 1
2
Push
or
to select the speed or tacho indicator set mode. ( ) Turn the speed or tacho indicator to “OFF” and then “ON” by pushing the “ON/
OFF” button. ( )
After one second, the mode enters the indicator setting mode.
The speedometer or tachometer needle moves to the previously set speed.
133
2-2. Instrument cluster
STEP 2
Push
or
within 6 seconds of the speedometer or tachometer needle moving to change the setting of the desired speed, then turn the indicator mode to “ON” by pushing the “ON/OFF” button.
Pushing and holding the switch changes values at a faster rate.
If the satellite switch is not operated for some time, the multi-information display returns to its previously displayed content.
The yellow indicator is displayed to indicate that the desired speed has been set.
■
Speed indicator display conditions and vehicle speed setting range
Vehicle speed setting range: Approximately 30 to 100 mph
(approximately 50 to 160 km/h)
When the maximum speed is selected, the speed indicator comes on only in red.
■
Tacho indicator display conditions and engine speed setting range
Engine rpm setting range: Approximately 2000 to 6500 rpm (r/min)
When the maximum rpm is selected, the tacho indicator comes on only in red.
134
2-2. Instrument cluster
NOTICE
■
To prevent damage to the engine and its components
●
Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indicates the maximum engine speed.
●
The engine may be overheating if the temperature gauge is in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (
2
135
2-2. Instrument cluster
The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.
Instrument cluster
The units used on the speedometer and the tachometer gauge display may differ depending on the model/type.
Center panel
136
2-2. Instrument cluster
■
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems.
Turn signal indicator
(
Headlight high beam indicator (
(U.S.A.)
Headlight indicator
(
(CANADA)
Tail light indicator
(
Front fog light indicator
(
(vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Shift position and shift range indicators (
(vehicles with an automatic transmission)
“ECT SNOW” indicator
(
(vehicles with a manual transmission)
“ETCS SNOW” indicator
(
(vehicles with an automatic transmission)
“ECT PWR” indicator
(
Cruise control indicator
(
*
(if equipped)
“AFS OFF” indicator light
(
(if equipped)
*
Intuitive parking assist indicator (
Slip indicator (
* “VSC OFF” indicator
(
*
SRS airbag on-off indicator (
2
137
2-2. Instrument cluster
■
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the vehicle’s systems. (
* * * * * *
* *
(U.S.A.)
*
(Canada)
*
(Canada)
*
(U.S.A.)
*
(Canada) (U.S.A.) (if equipped)
*
: These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■
If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.
138
2-2. Instrument cluster
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of drivingrelated data, including the current outside air temperature.
●
Trip information (
Displays driving range, fuel consumption and other cruising related information.
● Satellite switch mode display
(
This switch is used to configure various function settings.
●
Intuitive parking assist display (if equipped)
Automatically displayed when using intuitive parking assist.
● Dynamic radar cruise control display (if equipped)
(
Automatically displayed when using dynamic radar cruise control.
●
Warning messages
(
Automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in one of the vehicle’s systems.
2
139
2-2. Instrument cluster
Without navigation system
Display items can be switched by pushing the “DISP” switch.
With navigation system
140
■
Displays the outside air temperature.
The temperature range that can be displayed is from
-40
F (40
C) to 122
F (50
C).
When the temperature drops to 37 F (3 C), the digits of the display will flash for 10 seconds.
2-2. Instrument cluster
■
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.
• This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated.
2
■
Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset.
The function can be reset by pushing the “DISP” switch for longer than one second when the average fuel consumption is displayed.
■
Displays the average fuel consumption since the vehicle was last refueled.
■
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.
■
Displays the average vehicle speed since the engine was started or the function was reset.
The function can be reset by pushing the “DISP” switch for longer than one second when the average vehicle speed is displayed.
141
2-2. Instrument cluster
■
Indicates the current gear, and the range of gears that is available when the shift lever is in the S or D position. the gear range is shown by the number of dots (
) and the current gear is shown as a number.
The transmission automatically selects the gears within the driver selected gear range.
In the illustration to the left, a range of 6 available gears
(1 through 6) has been selected by the driver. (The shift lever is in the D or S position with 6 ranges enabled) It is possible for the transmission to automatically select between all 6 of the gears. In this case, the transmission has selected third gear.
■
System check display
After switching the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode,
“CHECK” is displayed while system operation is checked. When the system check is complete, “COMPLETED” is displayed before returning to the normal screen.
CAUTION
■
The information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag between the driver's shifting and the new gear number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in personal death or injury.
142
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
U.S.A.
CANADA
The side marker, parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights turn on.
The headlights and all lights listed above turn on.
The headlights and parking lights turn on and off automatically.
(When the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode)
2
With the headlights on, push the lever forward to turn on the high beams.
Pull the lever back to the center position to turn the high beams off.
Pull the lever toward you to turn on the high beams.
Release to turn them off. You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.
143
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
AFS (Adaptive Front—lighting System) improves visibility at intersections and on curves by automatically adjusting the level of the headlights according to vehicle speed and the degree of the tire angle that are controlled by steering input.
Operates at speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher.
■
How to switch:
turns on when the AFS is deactivated.
■
Daytime running light system
To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on automatically (at a reduced intensity) whenever the engine is started and the parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.
■
Headlight control sensor
The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic headlight system to malfunction.
144
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
■
Automatic light off system
●
When the headlights comes on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after a door is opened and closed if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch has been switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF. (The light turns off immediately if on the key is pressed after all doors are locked.)
●
When only the tail lights come on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned
OFF and driver’s door is opened.
To turn the lights on again, switch to IGNITION ON mode, or turn the light switch off once and then back to or .
■
Automatic headlight leveling system (vehicles with discharge headlights)
The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not interfere with other road users.
■
If flashes... (vehicles with discharge headlights)
It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■
Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed. (Customizable features
2
NOTICE
■
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
145
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain or fog. They can be turned on only when the headlights are on low beam.
To turn the front fog lights off
To turn the front fog lights on
146
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
■
Wiper intervals can be adjusted for intermittent operation (when
“INT” is selected).
Intermittent windshield wiper interval adjustment
(increase)
Intermittent windshield wiper interval adjustment
(decrease)
Intermittent windshield wiper operation
Low speed windshield wiper operation
High speed windshield wiper operation
Temporary operation
Wash/wipe operation
Wipers operate automatically.
(After operating several times, the wipers operate one more time after a short delay to prevent dripping.)
2
147
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
■
With “AUTO” selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed.
Sensor sensitivity (low)
Sensor sensitivity (high)
Rain-sensing wiper operation
Low speed wiper operation
High speed wiper operation
Temporary operation
Wash/wipe operation
Wipers operate automatically.
(After operating several times, the wipers operate one more time after a short delay to prevent dripping.)
■
The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■
Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation
Vehicle speed affects the following even when the wipers are not in “AUTO” mode.
●
Intermittent wiper interval (“INT” mode)
●
Wiper operation when the washer is being used (delay until drip prevention wiper sweep occurs)
With “LO” selected, wiper operation will be switched from low speed to intermittent wiper operation only when the vehicle is stationary.
(However, the mode cannot be switched when the adjustment dial for the intermittent wiper interval is set to the lowest setting.)
148
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
■
Rain drop sensor (vehicles equipped with the rain-sensing windshield wipers)
The sensor judges the amount of raindrops.
■
Outside rear view mirror defogger activation linked to windshield wiper operation
The outside rear view mirror defogger automatically turns on when you operate the windshield wipers.
■
If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
■
Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. drip prevention function) can be changed. (Customizable features
2
CAUTION
■
Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in “AUTO” mode
The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the windshield is subject to vibration in “AUTO” mode. Take care that your fingers or anything else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.
149
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
NOTICE
■
When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■
When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you and held continually.
■
When using an automatic car wash
Set the wiper switch to “OFF”.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may be damaged.
150
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights.
Press the switch to clean the headlights.
■
The headlight cleaner can be operated when
When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the headlight switch is turned on.
NOTICE
■
When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not use this function when the washer fluid tank is empty. This may cause the washer fluid pump to overheat.
2
151
2-4. Using other driving systems
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without using the accelerator.
■
STEP 1
Turn the “ON-OFF” button on.
Push the button once more to deactivate the cruise control.
152
STEP 2
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed and press the lever down to set the cruise control speed.
■
Increase speed
Decrease speed
Hold the lever until the desired speed setting is obtained.
Fine adjustment of the set speed (approximately 1.0 mph
[1.6 km/h]) can be made by lightly pressing the lever up or down and releasing it.
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
Cancel
Push the lever towards you to cancel cruise control.
The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied or the clutch (manual transmission) is depressed.
Resume
To resume cruise control and return to the set speed, push the lever up.
2
■
Cruise control can be set when
●
The shift lever is in the D or 4, 5 or 6 range of S. (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
●
Vehicle speed is between approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) and 125 mph
(200 km/h).
■
Accelerating
The vehicle can be accelerated normally.
■
Automatic cruise control cancellation
The set speed is automatically cancelled in any of the following situations.
●
Actual vehicle speed falls more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle speed
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
●
Actual vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40km/h)
●
VSC is activated
153
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
If the cruise control indicator light flashes
Turn the “ON-OFF” button off once, and then reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■
To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Keep the “ON-OFF” button off when not in use.
■
Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in control of the vehicle being lost and could cause serious or fatal accident.
●
In heavy traffic
●
On roads with sharp bends
●
On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
●
On steep hills
●
On winding roads
154
2-4. Using other driving systems
Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise control with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or decelerates in order to maintain a set following distance from vehicles ahead.
■
Selecting vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
Turn the “ON-OFF” button on.
Push the button once more to deactivate.
2
Selecting conventional constant speed control mode
Turn the “ON-OFF” button on.
Push the button once more to deactivate.
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is always reset when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to IGNITION
ON mode.
Switch to constant speed control mode.
(push and hold for approximately one second)
155
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed and press the lever down to set.
156
■
Increase speed
Decrease speed
Hold the lever until the desired speed setting is displayed.
In the constant speed control mode, fine adjustment of the set speed (approximately 1.0 mph
[1.6 km/h]) can be made by lightly pressing the lever up or down and releasing it.
■
Cancel
Push the lever towards you to cancel cruise control.
The setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied.
Resume
To resume cruise control and return to the set speed, push the lever up.
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
Preceding vehicle mark
Each push of the switch changes the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Long
Medium
Short
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is automatically set to the long mode when the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is switched to IGNITION ON mode.
A mark will be displayed to indicate the presence of the vehicle if a vehicle is running ahead of you.
2
157
2-4. Using other driving systems
This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles within 328 ft. (100 m) ahead and to judge the distance between your vehicle and those vehicles.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close when traveling on long downhill slopes.
158
Example of constant speed cruising (when there are no vehicles ahead): When set to 62 mph (100 km/h)
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch.
Example of deceleration cruising (when the vehicle ahead is driving slower than the set speed): When fixed speed cruising is set at 62 mph
(100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead is driving at 50 mph (80 km/h)
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, in the same lane, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes. A warning tone warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing on the vehicle ahead.
Example of follow-up cruising (when following a vehicle driving slower than the set speed): When the speed is set to 62 mph (100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead is driving at 50 mph (80 km/h)
2-4. Using other driving systems
The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver.
Example of acceleration (when there are no longer vehicles driving slower than the set speed in the lane ahead): When the speed is set to
62 mph (100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead driving at 50 mph (80 km/h) is out of the lane
When the vehicle ahead of you executes a lane change, the system slowly accelerates until the set vehicle speed is reached. The system then returns to fixed speed cruising.
2
■
Dynamic radar cruise control warning lights, messages and buzzers
Warning lights, messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to alert you to the need for caution while driving. (
■
The dynamic radar cruise can be set when
●
The shift lever is in D or the 4, 5 or 6 range of S.
●
Vehicle speed is between approximately 30 mph (45 km/h) and 85 mph (135 km/h).
■
Accelerating
The vehicle can be accelerated normally.
■
Automatically canceling vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the following situations.
●
Vehicle speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h)
●
VSC is activated
●
The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way.
●
The windshield wipers are operating at high speed.
●
The “ECT SNOW” switch is set to snow mode.
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
159
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
Automatically cancelling constant speed control
The set speed is automatically canceled in the following situations.
●
Actual vehicle speed is more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle speed
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
●
Vehicle speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h)
●
VSC is activated
■
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings
Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/ decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.
Distance options
Long
Medium
Short
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Approximately 164 ft. (50 m)
Approximately 132 ft. (40 m)
Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)
■
Radar sensor and grille cover
Always keep the sensor and grille cover clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as snow, ice or plastic objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.)
Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected.
Grille cover
Radar sensor
160
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
Certification
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
FCC RF exposure information
This device complies with the FCC RF exposure requirements.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions;
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
2
CAUTION
■
Before using dynamic radar cruise control
Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.
Be aware of the set vehicle speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not appropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicle and vehicles ahead by applying the brakes, etc.
■
To avoid inadvertent cruise control activation
Keep the “ON-OFF” button off when not in use.
161
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■
Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control
Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate control of speed and could cause serious or fatal accident.
●
In heavy traffic
●
On roads with sharp bends
●
On winding roads
●
On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
●
Where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down gradients
●
At entrances to expressways
●
When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors from functioning correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, etc.)
●
Where buzzer can be heard often
■
When the radar sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles are in front of you.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the proximity alarm (
P. 369) will not be activated, and an accident may result.
●
Vehicles that cut in suddenly
●
Vehicles traveling at low speeds
●
Vehicles that are not moving
●
Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)
●
Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
162
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■
Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not function correctly
Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sensor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and an accident may result.
●
When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the functioning of the sensor
●
When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the trunk, etc.)
●
When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow
●
When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable
■
To ensure the radar sensor functions correctly
Do not do the following to the sensor or grille cover as doing so may cause the sensor not to function correctly and could result in an accident.
●
Stick or attach anything to them
●
Leave them dirty
●
Disassemble, subject them to strong shocks
●
Modify or paint them
●
Replace them with non-genuine parts
2
163
2-4. Using other driving systems
The distance to obstacles measured by the sensors is communicated via the multi-information display and a buzzer when parallel parking or maneuvering into a garage. Always check the surrounding area when using this system.
For vehicles equipped with a navigation system, refer to the separate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual” for further details.
■
Front corner sensors
Rear corner sensors
Back sensors
■
Front corner sensor operation
Rear corner sensor operation
Back sensor operation
164
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
When on, an indicator is displayed to inform the driver that the function is operational.
2
■
The system operates when the vehicle approaches within approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm) of an obstacle.
Approximately 1.2 ft. (37.5 cm) to 1.6 ft. (50 cm) from the obstacle
Approximately 0.8 ft. (25 cm) to 1.2 ft. (37.5 cm) from the obstacle
Flashing: Within 0.8 ft. (25 cm) of the obstacle
165
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
The system operates when the vehicle approaches within approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm) of an obstacle.
Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 4.9 ft. (150 cm) from the obstacle
Approximately 1.5 ft. (45 cm) to
2.0 ft. (60 cm) from the obstacle
Approximately 1.1 ft. (35 cm) to
1.5 ft. (45 cm) from the obstacle
Flashing: Within 1.1 ft. (35 cm) of the obstacle
■
A buzzer sounds when the corner sensors and back sensor are operating.
● The buzzer beeps faster as the vehicle approaches an obstacle. When the vehicle comes within the following distance of the obstacle, the buzzer sounds continuously.
•
Corner sensors: Approximately 0.8 ft. (25 cm)
•
Back sensors: Approximately 1.1 ft. (35 cm)
●
When two or more obstacles are detected simultaneously, the buzzer system responds to the nearest obstacle.
166
2-4. Using other driving systems
Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm)
Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)
Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm)
The diagram shows the detection range of the sensors. Note that the sensors cannot detect obstacles that are extremely close to the vehicle.
The range of the sensors may change depending on the shape of the object etc.
2
167
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
Sensor detection information
●
Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability of the sensor to correctly detect obstacles. Particular instances where this may occur are listed below.
• There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor.
• The sensor is frozen.
• The sensor is covered in any way.
• The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.
• On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass.
• The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves.
• There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity.
• The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.
• The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or wireless antenna.
• Towing eyelets are installed.
• The bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.
• The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb.
• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather
In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their shapes, signs and other objects may be judged by the sensor to be closer than they are.
●
The shape of the obstacle may prevent the sensor from detecting it. Pay particular attention to the following obstacles.
• Wires, fences, ropes etc.
• Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb radio waves
• Sharply-angled objects
• Low obstacles
• Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your vehicle
■
When the display flashes and a message is displayed
■
Certification (Canada only)
This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.
168
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. buzzer volume) can be changed. (Customizable features
CAUTION
■
Caution when using the intuitive parking sensor
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident.
●
Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).
●
Do not attach any accessories within the sensor range.
2
NOTICE
■
Notes when washing the vehicle
Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.
169
2-4. Using other driving systems
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
■
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface.
■
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation.
■
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces.
■
Maintains drive power and prevents the rear wheels (2WD models) or all wheels (AWD models) from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.
■
Prevents the vehicle from rolling backwards when starting on an incline or slippery slope.
■
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel.
170
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
Provides integrated control of the ABS, brake assist, TRAC, VSC, hill-start assist control, and EPS systems.
Maintains vehicle stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by controlling the brakes and engine output.
■
If the vehicle is in danger of slipping, rolling backwards when starting on an incline, or if the rear wheels (2WD) or 4 wheels
(AWD) spin, the slip indicator light flashes to indicate that the VSC/
TRAC/hill-start assist control systems have been engaged.
A buzzer (intermittent) sounds to indicate that VSC is operating.
The stop lights and high mounted stoplight turn on when the hill-start assist control system is operating.
2
171
2-4. Using other driving systems
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, TRAC and VSC may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
■
Quickly push and release the button to turn off TRAC.
The slip indicator light should come on.
Push the button again to turn the system back on.
■
Push and hold the button for more than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped to turn off TRAC and
VSC.
The slip indicator light and “VSC
OFF” indicator light should come on.
Push the button again to turn the system back on.
172
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
Automatic reactivation of TRAC and VSC
Turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF after turning off the TRAC and
VSC systems will automatically re-enable them.
■
Automatic TRAC reactivation
If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will turn on when vehicle speed increases.
■
Automatic TRAC and VSC reactivation
If the TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, the systems will not turn on even when vehicle speed increases.
■
Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC, TRAC and hill-start assist control systems
●
A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
●
Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.
• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.
2
173
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
Hill-start assist control is operational when
●
The shift lever is in the D or S position.
●
The brake pedal is not depressed.
■
Reduced effectiveness of EPS
The effectiveness of EPS is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine OFF. The system should return to normal within
10 minutes.
CAUTION
■
The ABS does not operate effectively when
●
The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded.
●
The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick road.
■
Stopping distance when the ABS is operating will exceed that of normal conditions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situations.
●
When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
●
When driving with tire chains
●
When driving over bumps in the road
●
When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven roads
174
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■
TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
■
If hill-start assist control does not operate effectively
(vehicles with an automatic transmission)
The hill-start assist control may not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered in ice.
■
When the VSC is activated
The slip indicator light flashes and a warning buzzer sounds. Always drive carefully.
Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes and a buzzer sounds.
■
When TRAC and VSC are off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As there are systems to ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn off TRAC and VSC unless necessary.
■
Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire pressure level.
The ABS and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are fitted on the vehicle.
Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.
■
Handling of tires and suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction.
2
175
2-4. Using other driving systems
Safety systems such as the brakes and seat belts are automatically engaged to lessen impact and injuries to occupants as well as vehicle damage when the radar sensor detects an unavoidable frontal collision.
■
The seat belts are immediately retracted as the effect of the pretensioner is increased (
P. 53), to provide even greater constraining force to protect
the driver and passengers. In the event of sudden braking or skidding, the system will operate even if no obstacle has been detected.
■
Applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is depressed.
Detects vehicles or other obstacles on or near the road ahead and determines whether a collision is imminent based on the position, speed, and heading of the obstacles.
Grille cover
Radar sensor
■
Obstacles not detected
The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as pylons. There may also be occasions when the sensor cannot detect pedestrians, animals, bicycles, motorcycles, trees, or snowdrifts.
176
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
The pre-collision system is operational when
●
Seat belt (linked to the radar sensor)
• Vehicle speed is above 3 mph (5 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or oncoming vehicle exceeds 18 to 24 mph (30 to 40 km/h).
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
●
Seat belts (linked to brake operation)
• Vehicle speed exceeds 9 mph (15 km/h).
• The system detects sudden braking or skidding.
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
●
Brake Assist
• Vehicle speed is above 18 mph (30 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle is greater than 18 to 24 mph (30 to 40 km/h).
• The brake pedal is depressed.
■
Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no danger of collision
●
When there is an object by the roadside at the entrance to a curve
●
When passing an oncoming vehicle on a curve
●
When driving over a narrow iron bridge
●
When there is a metal object on the road surface
●
When driving on an uneven road surface
●
When passing an oncoming vehicle on a left-turn
●
When your vehicle rapidly closes on the vehicle in front
When the system is activated in the situations described above there is also a possibility that the seat belts will retract quickly and the brakes will be applied with a force greater than normal. When the seat belt is locked in the retracted position, stop the vehicle in a safe place, release the seat belt and refasten.
■
When there is a malfunction in the system
Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. (
2
177
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■
Handling the radar sensor
Observe the following to ensure the pre-collision system can function effectively.
●
Keep the sensor and front grille clean at all times.
Clean the sensor and front grille with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage them.
●
Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the sensor or surrounding area are subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected and adjusted by a Lexus dealer.
●
Do not disassemble the sensor.
●
Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille guard or surrounding area.
■
Limitations of the pre-collision system
Do not rely on the pre-collision system. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings and checking for any obstacles or other road hazards.
178
2-5. Driving information
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load.
● Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible. Be sure all items are secured in place.
● Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.
● For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
2
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400
750 (5
150) = 650 lbs.)
(5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
179
2-5. Driving information
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity
180
When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 825 lb. (375 kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows:
825 lb. — 366 lb. = 459 lb. (375 kg —166 kg = 209 kg)
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of 388 lb.
(176 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced as follows:
459 lb. — 388 lb. = 71 lb. (209 kg — 176 kg = 33 kg)
As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load equaling the combined weight of the occupants who got on later, by an amount. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■
Storage precautions
●
Do not place anything on the package tray behind the rear seatback.
Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an accident.
●
Do not drive with objects on top of the instrument panel.
They may interfere with the driver’s field of view or move during sharp acceleration or turning, thus impairing the driver’s control of the vehicle. In an accident they may injure the vehicle occupants.
●
Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure someone during an accident or sudden braking.
■
Capacity and distribution
●
Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.
●
Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.
2
181
2-5. Driving information
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity.
■
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage.
■
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
■
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
■
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants.
■
Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information label.
(
CAUTION
■
Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident.
182
2-5. Driving information
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.
■
● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid
• Have a service technician inspect the level and specific gravity of battery electrolyte.
● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for the rear tires.
Ensure that all tires are the specified size and the same brand, and that chains match the size of the tires.
■
Perform the following according to the driving conditions.
●
Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
●
To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield.
●
Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis.
●
Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the brakes.
2
183
2-5. Driving information
■
Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.
■
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or R (manual transmission) without setting the parking brake.
The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released.
Snow chains can be mounted on 16- and 17-inch tires. They cannot be mounted on 18-inch tires. Use the correct snow chain size when mounting the snow chains. Chain size is regulated for each tire sizes.
Side chain
(0.12 in. [3 mm] in diameter)
Cross chain
(0.16 in. [4 mm] in diameter)
● Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.
● Install the chains on the rear tires.
● Retighten the chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).
184
2-5. Driving information
■
Snow chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains.
●
Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
●
Install tire chains on the rear tires only. Do not install tire chains on front tires.
●
Install the tire chains on rear tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).
●
Install tire chains following the instructions provided in the accompanying instructions.
2
CAUTION
■
Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.
●
Use tires of the size specified for your vehicle.
●
Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
●
Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires being used.
●
Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
■
Driving with snow chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may cause death or serious injury.
●
Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
●
Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
●
Avoid sudden turns and braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle handling.
●
Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained.
185
2-5. Driving information
NOTICE
■
Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs of and obtain replacement snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire air pressure sensor.
■
Fitting tire chains
The tire air pressure sensor may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted.
186
2-5. Driving information
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your Lexus is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.
2
187
2-5. Driving information
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.
NOTICE
■
To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.
188
2-5. Driving information
Your vehicle can be dinghy towed in a forward direction (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.
To prevent damage to your vehicle, perform the following procedures before towing.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
Shift the shift lever to neutral.
Switch to ACCESSORY mode. (
Ensure that the audio system and other powered devices have been turned OFF.
Release the parking brake.
After towing, leave the engine in idle for at least 3 minutes before driving the vehicle.
■
Necessary equipment and accessories
Specialized equipment and accessories are required for dinghy towing. Contact the service branch of the motor home manufacturer regarding recommended equipment.
2
189
2-5. Driving information
NOTICE
■
Dinghy towing direction
Do not tow the vehicle backwards.
Doing so may cause serious damage.
■
To prevent the steering from locking
Ensure the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY mode.
190
3
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger ................ 192
Automatic air conditioning system ...................................... 192
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers ............................. 200
3-2. Using the audio system........................... 201
Audio system type................... 201
Using the radio....................... 204
Using the CD player ............... 211
WMA discs............................. 217
Optimal use of the audio system ..................................... 225
Using the AUX adapter...... 228
Using the steering wheel audio switches...................... 229
3-3. Using the interior lights .............................. 231
Interior lights list...................... 231
• Interior lights ........................ 234
• Personal lights...................... 234
3-4. Using the storage features ........................ 236
List of storage features......... 236
• Glove box.............................. 236
• Console boxes..................... 237
• Overhead console.............. 238
• Cup holders.......................... 239
• Bottle holders/ door pockets ......................... 241
3-5. Other interior features ........................ 242
Sun visors ................................. 242
Vanity mirror ........................... 243
Clock......................................... 244
Satellite switches................... 245
Ashtrays.................................... 248
Cigarette lighter.................... 249
Power outlet ............................ 250
Seat heaters ............................. 251
Seat heaters and ventilators ............................. 253
Armrest .................................... 255
Rear sunshade ........................ 256
Trunk storage extension ...... 258
Coat hooks .............................. 259
Floor mat .................................. 260
Trunk features........................... 261
Garage door opener ............ 264
Compass ................................... 269
191
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
With navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the
“Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
Without navigation system
Fan speed
Fan speed display
Off
Driver’s side temperature setting display
Automatic mode
Airflow display
Changes the air outlets used
Passenger’s side temperature setting display
Micro dust and pollen filter
Driver's side temperature control
Dual operation switch
Air conditioning on/off switch
Passenger’s side temperature control
Front windshield defogger
Outside air or recirculated mode
192
STEP 1
Press .
The air conditioning system will begin to operate. Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
STEP 2
Press to switch to automatic mode. (IS350 only)
Automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
STEP 3
Press
to increase the temperature and
to decrease the temperature on .
The temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be set separately.
■
Press
to increase the temperature and
to decrease the temperature on .
3
Press
(increase) or
(decrease) on to separately adjust the temperature for the passenger and driver sides (dual mode). Press to return the driver and passenger side temperatures to the same setting (simultaneous mode).
The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous modes each time is pressed.
■
Press
(increase) or
(decrease) on .
Press to turn the fan off.
193
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■
Press .
The air outlets switch each time the button is pressed.
*
*
*
*
Air flows to the upper body.
Air flows to the upper body and feet.
Air flows to the feet.
Air flows to the feet and the front windshield defogger operates.
*:
Only in the automatic mode
194
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■
IS250
Press .
The mode switches between (recycles air inside the vehicle) and
(introduces air from outside the vehicle) modes each time the button is pressed.
IS350
Press .
The mode switches among
“AUTO” and time the button is pressed.
(recycles air inside the vehicle),
(introduces air from outside the vehicle) modes each
When the system is switched to automatic mode, the air conditioning system operates automatically.
3
Defogging
The air conditioning system control operates automatically.
Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to (outside air) mode.
195
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Press .
Outside air mode switches to
(recirculated air) mode. Pollen is removed from the air and the air flows to the upper part of the body.
To stop the operation, press again.
STEP 1
Press onds.
for 2 or more sec-
STEP 2
Press
(increase) or
(decrease) on .
From —3 (low) to 3 (high) can be set.
196
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down
Turn the knob up to open the vent and down to close the vent
Front outlets (right and left side)
Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down
Turn the knob right to open the vent and left to close the vent
3
Rear outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down
Turn the knob fully to the outside of the vehicle to close the vent
197
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■
Using the automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature setting and ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur.
●
The system may switch automatically to recirculated mode when the coolest temperature setting is selected in summer.
●
Immediately after the switch is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow.
●
Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is on.
■
Using the system in recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for an extended period.
■
Window defogger feature
Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to ations where the windows need to be defogged.
■
When outside air temperature approaches 32
F (0
C)
The air conditioning system may not operate even when
(outside air) mode in situis pressed.
■
When the indicator light on flashes
Press and turn off the air conditioning system before turning it on once more. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indicator light continues to flash. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it inspected by your
Lexus dealer.
■
Automatic mode for air intake control (IS350 only)
In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.
■
Micro dust and pollen filter
●
In order to prevent the window from fogging up when the outside air is cold, the following may occur.
• Outside air mode does not switch to .
• The air conditioning system operates automatically.
• The operation cancels after 1 minute.
●
In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press .
198
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
CAUTION
■
To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
NOTICE
■
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the automatic air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is stopped.
3
199
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
These features are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.
On/off
The defoggers will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.
CAUTION
■
When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on
Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirror, as it can become very hot and burn you.
200
3-2. Using the audio system
With navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
Without navigation system (type A)
CD player with changer and AM/FM radio
3
Without navigation system (type B)
CD player with changer and AM/FM radio
201
3-2. Using the audio system
Title
Using the radio
Using the CD player
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs
Optimal use of the audio system
Using the AUX adapter
Using the steering wheel audio switches
Page
■
Using cellular phones
Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.
CAUTION
■
For vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada
●
Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s authority to operate this device.
●
Laser products
• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself.
This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages.
• This product utilizes a laser.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
202
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the engine off.
■
To avoid damaging the audio system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.
3
203
3-2. Using the audio system
Seeking any traffic program station
Station selector Displays radio text messages
Power Volume
Seeking the frequency
AM
SAT/FM mode buttons
Adjusting the frequency
(AM, FM mode) or channel (SAT mode)
Changing the program types
Scans for receivable stations
®
STEP 1
Search for desired stations by turning or pressing
or
on .
STEP 2
Press and hold the button (from be set to, and you hear a beep.
to ) the station is to
®
■
STEP 1
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.
STEP 2
When the desired station is reached, press the button once again.
204
3-2. Using the audio system
■
STEP 1
Press .
All stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each.
STEP 2
When the desired station is reached, press the button once again.
This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations which broadcast this information.
■
STEP 1
Press
or
on during FM reception.
The type of program changes each time the button is pressed.
●
ROCK
●
EASYLIS (Easy listening)
●
CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz)
●
R & B (Rhythm and Blues)
●
INFORM (Information)
●
RELIGION
●
MISC (Miscellaneous)
●
ALERT (Emergency messages)
If the system receives no RDS stations, “NO PTY” appears on the display.
3
STEP 1
Press ,
on .
The radio seeks or scans the station by the relevant program type.
205
3-2. Using the audio system
■
Press .
■
If MSG shows in the display, a text message will be displayed.
If the text continues past the end of the display, is displayed. Press and hold until you hear a beep.
®
■
®
STEP 1
Press and hold until SAT shows in the display.
The display changes as follows each time the switch is pressed.
AM
SAT1
SAT2
SAT3
STEP 2
Turn to select the desired channel in the all categories or press
or
on to select the desired channel in the current category.
■
®
Select the desired channel. Press the button the channel is to be set to
(from to ), and you hear a beep.
■
Press
or
on .
206
3-2. Using the audio system
■
®
●
Scanning channels in the current category
STEP 1
STEP 2
When the desired channel is reached, press the switch again.
●
Scanning preset channels
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
When the desired channel is reached, press the switch again.
■
Press .
The display will show up to 10 characters.
The display changes as follows each time the button is pressed.
● CH NAME
● TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM TITLE)
● NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEATURE)
● CH NUMBER
3
207
3-2. Using the audio system
■
When the battery is disconnected
Stations presets are erased.
■
Reception sensitivity
●
Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.
●
The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window. To maintain clear radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.
■
XM
®
Satellite Radio
An XM
®
Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts provided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous states and 10 Canadian provinces.
●
XM
®
subscriptions
For detailed information about XM
®
Satellite Radio or to subscribe:
U.S.A.
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.com or call 1-877-515-3987.
Canada
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677.
●
Radio ID
You will need the radio ID when activating XM
®
service or reporting a problem. Select “CH000” using , and the receiver's 8-character ID number will appear.
●
Satellite tuner
The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying Text Information of XM
®
Satellite Radio.
208
3-2. Using the audio system
■
If the satellite radio does not operate normally
If a problem occurs with the XM
®
tuner, a message will appear on the display. Refer to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action.
“ANTENNA”
“UPDATING”
“NO SIGNAL”
“LOADING”
“OFF AIR”
“-----”
The XM
® the XM
®
antenna is not connected. Check whether
antenna cable is attached securely.
There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer.
You have not subscribed to the XM
®
Satellite Radio.
The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code. Contact the XM
®
Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can choose the “CH000” and all free-to-air channels.
The premium channel you selected is not authorized.
Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. If you want to listen to the premium channel, contact the XM
®
Satellite
Radio.
The XM
®
signal is too weak at the current location.
Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.
The unit is acquiring audio or program information.
Wait until the unit has received the information.
The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.
There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at that time. No action needed.
3
209
3-2. Using the audio system
“---”
The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel.
Contact the XM
®
Listener Care Center at 1-877-515-3987 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-
438-9677 (Canada).
■
Certifications for the radio tuner
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of the following:
●
Reorienting or relocate the receiving antenna.
●
Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver.
●
Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
●
Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
210
3-2. Using the audio system
Repeat play
Random playback
Displays text message
Power Volume
Track selection
CD eject Playback
Search playback
Selecting a CD
CD insert
■
STEP 1
Push .
“WAIT” is shown on the display.
STEP 2
Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green.
The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”.
■
STEP 1
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
“WAIT” is shown on the display.
STEP 2
Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green.
The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”.
The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the CD is inserted.
211
3
3-2. Using the audio system
STEP 3
Insert the next CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green again.
Repeat the procedure for the remaining CDs.
To stop the operation, press .
■
STEP 1
To select the CD to be ejected, press
or
on .
The number of the CD selected is shown on the display.
STEP 2
Press and remove the CD.
■
Press and hold until you hear a beep, and then remove the CDs.
■
Press
to move up and
to move down using until the desired track number is displayed.
To fast forward or reverse, press and hold
or
on
■
STEP 1
Press .
The first ten seconds of each track will be played.
STEP 2
.
Press the switch again when the desired track is reached.
212
3-2. Using the audio system
■
To select the desired CD, press
or
on .
■
STEP 1
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first track on each CD will be played.
STEP 2
Press the switch again when the desired CD is reached.
■
Press (RAND).
Songs are played in random order until random playback is canceled.
■
Press and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep.
Tracks on all loaded CDs are played in a random order until the button is pressed once more.
Press .
Each time the switch is pressed, the display changes in the order of Track no./
Elapsed time
CD title
Track name.
3
213
3-2. Using the audio system
■
Canceling random, repeat and scan playback
Press (RAND), (RPT), or again.
■
When “LOAD”, “ERROR” or “WAIT” is shown on the display
“LOAD”: This indicates that the CD player has completed loading the CD.
“ERROR”: Make sure the label of the displayed disc is facing up, and then reinsert it in the player.
“WAIT”: Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for a while and then press still cannot be played back.
. Contact your Lexus dealer if the CD
■
Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
■
CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected.
■
If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods
CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.
■
Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
214
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■
CDs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual Discs.
Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.
●
CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in.
(12 cm).
●
Low-quality and deformed CDs.
3
●
CDs with a transparent or translucent recording area.
●
CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-R labels attached to them, or that have had the label peeled off.
215
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■
CD player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the CDs or the player itself.
●
Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.
●
Do not apply oil to the CD player.
●
Store CDs away from direct sunlight.
●
Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.
●
Do not insert more than one CD at a time.
216
3-2. Using the audio system
Repeat play
Random playback
Selecting a folder
Displays text message
Power Volume
Selecting a file
Selecting a file
CD eject
Playback
Search playback
Selecting a CD
CD insert
Refer to the section entitled “Using the CD player” for details. (
■
Press (
) or (
) to select the desired folder.
■
Press and hold until you hear a beep. When the desired folder is reached, press the switch once again.
■
Press and hold (
) until you hear a beep.
3
217
3-2. Using the audio system
■
Turn or press
or
on to select the desired file.
■
Press .
When the desired file is reached, press the switch once again.
Press (RPT).
Press and hold (RPT) until you hear a beep.
■
Press (RAND).
■
Press and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep.
Press .
Each time the switch is pressed, the display changes in the order of Folder no./File no./Elapsed time
Folder name
File name
Album title (MP3 only)
Track title
Artist name.
218
3-2. Using the audio system
■
Canceling random, repeat and scan playback
Press (RAND), (RPT), or again.
■
When “LOAD”, “ERROR”, “WAIT” or “NO MUSIC” is shown on the display.
“LOAD”: This indicates that the CD player has completed loading the CD.
“ERROR”: Make sure the label of the displayed disc is facing up, and then reinsert it in the player.
“WAIT”: Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for a while and then press still cannot be played back.
. Contact your Lexus dealer if the CD
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that the MP3/WMA file is not included in the CD.
■
CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected while the CD player is being used.
■
If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods
CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.
■
Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
3
219
3-2. Using the audio system
■
MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media
TM
Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formats recorded by them that can be used.
●
MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)
*
Compatible with VBR
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
●
WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
*
Only compatible with 2-channel playback
●
Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status of the
CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.
220
3-2. Using the audio system
●
Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
●
File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
●
Multi-sessions
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.
●
ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
3
221
3-2. Using the audio system
●
MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannot be played.
●
Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.
●
Playback
• To play MP3 file with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of
128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
222
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■
CDs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual Discs.
Doing so may damage the CD player and render the CD insert/eject function unusable.
●
CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in.
(12 cm)
●
Low-quality and deformed CDs
3
●
CDs with a transparent or translucent recording area
●
CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-R labels attached to them, or that have had the label peeled off
223
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■
CD player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the CDs or the player itself.
●
Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.
●
Do not apply oil to the CD player.
●
Store CDs away from direct sunlight.
●
Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.
●
Do not insert more than one CD at a time.
224
3-2. Using the audio system
Type A
Adjusting the sound quality
Type B
Adjusting the ASL
Changing the listening position
Changing the sound quality modes
Adjusting the sound quality
3
Adjusting the ASL
Changing the sound quality modes
225
3-2. Using the audio system
Press .
The ASL switches between on and off modes each time the switch is pressed.
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the noise level as you drive your vehicle.
The sound feel setting can be changed to produce the best sound for each listening position.
Press (position selector) to change the setting.
The display changes as follows each time the button is pressed.
Display
“DRIVER”
“FRONT”
“REAR”
“ALL”
Listening position
Position best suited to the driver’s seat
Position best suited to the driver’s and front passenger seats
Position best suited to the rear seats
Position best suited to all seats
■
Press
Pressing the button changes the sound mode in the following order.
“BAS”
“MID”
“TRE”
“FAd”
“BAL”
“SURROUND” (type B only)
■
Press or to adjust the level.
226
3-2. Using the audio system
Sound quality mode
Bass
*
Mid-range
*
Treble
*
Front/rear volume balance
Left/right volume balance
Surround
(type B only)
Mode displayed
“BAS”
“MID”
“TRE”
“FAd”
“BAL”
“SUR-
ROUND”
Level
-5 to 5
-5 to 5
-5 to 5
F7 to R7
L7 to R7
On/off
Press
Low
Press
High
Shifts to rear Shifts to front
Shifts to left
Off
Shifts to right
On
*
: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each AM
FM or CD mode.
3
■
Surround (type B only)
When the surround mode is on, the matrix 7.1 surround sound system provides a realistic sound field.
227
3-2. Using the audio system
This adapter can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it through the vehicle’s speakers.
STEP 1
Connect the portable audio device.
STEP 2
Press .
■
Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
■
When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio device.
228
3-2. Using the audio system
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel.
Power on, select audio source
Volume
Radio: Select radio stations
CD: Select tracks, files (MP3 and WMA) and discs
Press when the audio system is turned off.
The audio system can be turned off by holding the switch down for 1 second or more.
Press when the audio system is turned on. The audio source changes as follows each time the switch is pressed.
FM1
FM2
CD changer
AUX
AM
SAT1
SAT2
SAT3
Press + on to increase the volume and - to decrease the volume.
Hold down the switch to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.
3
229
3-2. Using the audio system
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press to select the radio mode.
Press
or
on to select a radio station.
To scan for receivable stations, press and hold the switch until you hear a beep.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press to select the CD mode.
Press
or
on to select the desired track/file.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press to select the CD mode.
Press and hold
or
on until a beep is heard.
CAUTION
■
To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
230
3-3. Using the interior lights
Your Lexus is equipped with the illuminated entry system to assist in entering the vehicle. Owing to the function of the system, the lights shown in the following illustration automatically turn on/off according to the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, whether the doors are opened/closed, and the “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode.
3
Front personal lights (
Front interior light (
Front overhead courtesy light
Rear personal lights (
Rear interior light
Rear overhead courtesy light
Shift lever lighting (when “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode)
Front foot well lighting
231
3-3. Using the interior lights
Front door courtesy lighting
Front scuff lighting (if equipped)
Outer foot lights
Turning the instrument panel light control knob fully to the left disables the shift lever lighting and front foot well lighting.
232
3-3. Using the interior lights
■
Illuminated entry system
The following interior lights come on automatically when you approach the vehicle with the electronic key on your person. Note that the illuminated entry system operates only when the interior light switch (door position on/off) is on.
●
Front overhead courtesy light
●
Rear overhead courtesy light
●
Outer foot light
The following lights turn on when any of the doors is unlocked or opened.
●
Front interior light
●
Rear interior lights
●
Front foot well lighting
●
Front door courtesy lighting
●
Front scuff lighting
The following lights turn on for approximately 15 seconds when the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is turned to OFF from the IGNITION ON or ACCESSORY mode. (The lights turn off immediately if the doors are locked or the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is set to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.)
●
Front overhead courtesy light
●
Rear overhead courtesy light
■
To prevent the battery from being discharged
If the overhead courtesy lights and interior lights remain on when the door is not fully closed and the interior light switch (door position on/off) is on, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.
■
Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Setting (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed. (Customizable features
3
233
3-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights and personal lights
Models without an electric moon roof
Door position on/off
On/off
Models with an electric moon roof
Door position on/off
On/off
Front (models without an electric moon roof)
On/off
234
Front (models with an electric moon roof)
On/off
3-3. Using the interior lights
Personal lights
Rear
On/off
3
235
3-4. Using the storage features
Glove box
Glove box
Console boxes
Cup holders
Bottle holders/door pockets
Overhead console
Open (push button)
Lock with the mechanical key
Unlock with the mechanical key
236
3-4. Using the storage features
Glove box and console boxes
■
Glove box light
The glove box light turns on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNI-
TION ON mode.
■
Trunk opener main switch
The trunk opener main switch located in the glove box. (
CAUTION
■
Caution while driving
Keep the glove box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Front
Pull up the knob to release the lock.
Slide armrest.
Pull up the knob to release the lock.
Lift the armrest to open.
3
Rear (if equipped)
Press the button to release the lock.
Lift the armrest to open.
237
3-4. Using the storage features
Console boxes and overhead console
■
Console box light (front)
The console box light turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNI-
TION ON mode.
■
Using the front console box to store CD cases
Store a CD case with the hinged portion facing either the front or back of the console box.
CAUTION
■
Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
The overhead console is useful for temporarily storing sunglasses and similar small items.
238
3-4. Using the storage features
Overhead console and cup holders
CAUTION
■
Items that should not be left in the overhead console
Do not leave glasses or lighters in the console.
If the interior of the vehicle becomes hot, lighters may explode and glasses may warp or become cracked.
■
Caution while driving
Do not leave the overhead console open while driving.
Items may fall out and cause injury.
Front (type A)
To open, press down and release the front of the cup holder lid.
3
Front (type B)
Press the knob to release the lock.
Slide armrest.
239
3-4. Using the storage features
Rear
Cup holders
To open, press in and release the rear cup holder on the rear center armrest.
■
Using the front cup holder (type B) to store small items
Remove the cup holder insert holding the base part.
CAUTION
■
Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.
■
When not in use
Keep the cup holders closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
240
3-4. Using the storage features
Bottle holders/door pockets
The door pocket can be opened and closed.
When installing the bottle, close the cap of the bottle.
CAUTION
■
Caution while driving
Keep the door pockets closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
3
241
3-5. Other interior features
Forward position:
Flip down.
Side position:
Flip down, unhook, and swing to the side.
242
3-5. Other interior features
Slide the cover.
The light turns on when the cover is opened.
3
243
3-5. Other interior features
Adjusts the hour.
Adjusts the minutes.
Rounds to the nearest hour.
*
*
: e.g. 1:00 to 1:29
1:00
1:30 to 1:59
2:00
■
The clock is displayed when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
244
3-5. Other interior features
The satellite switches can be used to change the settings of various features. Settings are shown on the multi-information display.
■
STEP 1
Bring up the satellite switch mode on the multi-information display.
Press button.
,
or the “ON/OFF”
STEP 2
Select the item whose setting is to be changed.
Press
or
to display the item whose setting is to be changed.
3
STEP 3
Change the settings.
Press the “ON/OFF” button to change the settings (e.g. on/off).
245
3-5. Other interior features
■
Intuitive parking assist (
equipped)
Tire pressure warning system initialization
(
ID code selection for tire air pressure system
(
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) (
on/off (if equipped)
Vehicle speed indicator on/off and speed setting
(
Tacho indicator on/off and engine speed (rpm) setting (
246
3-5. Other interior features
■
Changing the settings
Each item is displayed and its setting can be changed only in the following conditions:
●
Intuitive parking assist: When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNI-
TION ON mode.
●
Items other than the above: When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
IGNITION ON mode and the vehicle is stopped.
■
Display
The display will return to the original display if the satellite switches are not operated for an extended period.
Even if the display is in satellite switch mode, it will switch in the event of a warning or when the radar cruise control is used. If this occurs, press any of the satellite switches or “DISP” switch on the steering wheel to return the display to satellite switch mode.
3
247
3-5. Other interior features
Front
Push the back part of the lid to open. Push the lid again to close.
Push the lever to remove the ashtray.
Rear
Pull the ashtray lid to open.
Hold the plate down and pull the ashtray upwards to remove.
CAUTION
■
When not in use
Keep the ashtray closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
■
To prevent fire
●
Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray, then make sure the ashtray is fully closed.
●
Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.
248
3-5. Other interior features
Push the back part of the lid to open, and push the cigarette lighter down.
The cigarette lighter will pop up when it is ready for use.
■
The cigarette lighter can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
3
CAUTION
■
To avoid burns or fires
●
Do not touch the metal parts of the cigarette lighter.
●
Do not hold the cigarette lighter down. It could overheat and cause a fire.
●
Do not insert anything other than the cigarette lighter into the outlet.
249
3-5. Other interior features
The power outlet can be used for 12 V accessories that run on less than 10
A.
■
The power outlet can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
NOTICE
■
To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.
■
To prevent the fuse from being blown
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
■
To prevent the battery from being discharged
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
250
3-5. Other interior features
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Heats the seats
Driver’s seat
Front passenger’s seat
The indicator light comes on.
The higher the number, the warmer the seats become.
Vehicles with a manual transmission
Driver’s seat
Front passenger’s seat
Heats the seats
The indicator light comes on.
The higher the number, the warmer the seats become.
3
■
The seat heaters can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■
When not in use
Set the dial to “0”. The indicator light turns off.
251
3-5. Other interior features
CAUTION
■
Burns
●
Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:
• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled
• Persons with sensitive skin
• Persons who are fatigued
• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.)
●
Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the seat and may lead to overheating.
NOTICE
■
To prevent seat heater damage
Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects
(needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■
To prevent battery discharge
Turn the switches off when the engine is not running.
252
3-5. Other interior features
The seat heaters and ventilators heat the seats and maintain good airflow by blowing air from the seats.
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Heats the seats
Driver’s seat
Front passenger’s seat
The indicator light (red) comes on.
The higher the number, the warmer the seats become.
Blows air from the seats
The indicator light (green) comes on.
The higher the number, the stronger the airflow becomes.
Vehicles with a manual transmission
Driver’s seat
Front passenger’s seat
Heats the seats
The indicator light (red) comes on.
The higher the number, the warmer the seats become.
Blows air from the seats
The indicator light (green) comes on.
The higher the number, the stronger the airflow becomes.
3
■
The seat heaters and ventilators can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■
When not in use
Set the dial to “0”. The indicator light turns off.
253
3-5. Other interior features
CAUTION
■
Burns
●
Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:
• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled
• Persons with sensitive skin
• Persons who are fatigued
• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.)
●
Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the seat and may lead to overheating.
NOTICE
■
To prevent seat heater damage
Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects
(needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■
To prevent battery discharge
Turn the switches off when the engine is not running.
254
3-5. Other interior features
Pull the armrest down for use.
NOTICE
■
To prevent damage to the armrest
Do not place too much strain on the armrest.
3
255
3-5. Other interior features
The rear sunshade can be raised and lowered by operating the switch shown below.
Raise/lower
■
Reverse operation feature
To ensure adequate rear visibility, the sunshade automatically lowers when the gear is shifted to R.
However, the rear sunshade is raised again if either of the following occurs:
●
The switch is pressed again.
●
The shift lever is shifted out of R, and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h).
If the engine is turned off when the rear sunshade has been lowered due to the reverse operation feature, it will not be raised even when the engine is turned on again and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h). To raise the sunshade again, press the switch.
■
The rear sunshade can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
256
3-5. Other interior features
CAUTION
■
When the rear sunshade is being raised or lowered
Do not place fingers or other objects in the fastener section or in the opening.
They may get caught, causing injury.
NOTICE
■
To prevent the battery from being discharged
Do not operate the rear sunshade when the engine is not running.
■
To ensure normal operation of the sunshade
Observe the following precautions.
●
Do not place excessive load on the motor or other components.
●
Do not place objects where they may hinder opening and closing operations.
●
Do not attach items to the rear sunshade.
●
Keep the opening clean and clear of obstructions.
●
Do not operate the rear sunshade continuously over long periods of time.
3
257
3-5. Other interior features
Long objects can be loaded in the vehicle by utilizing the trunk space and rear seat area.
STEP 1
Pull down the rear seat armrest.
STEP 2
Open the inside trunk door from the trunk and load baggage or other items.
CAUTION
■
When not in use
Ensure that the inside trunk door is closed.
In the event of sudden braking, items stored in the trunk may be thrown forward into the cabin, resulting in injury.
258
3-5. Other interior features
Pull out the hooks to hang coats or other soft items.
CAUTION
■
Items that must not be hung on the hook
Do not hang a coat hanger or other hard or sharp object on the hook. If the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles that cause death or serious injury.
3
259
3-5. Other interior features
Securely place a mat that matches the size of the space on the carpet.
Secure the driver’s floor mat using the hooks provided.
CAUTION
■
When inserting the floor mat
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in the floor mat slipping and interfering with the movement of the pedals during driving, resulting in an accident.
●
Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the vehicle carpet and the correct side faces upward.
●
Do not place floor mats on top of existing mats.
260
3-5. Other interior features
■
Cargo hooks are provided for securing loose items.
■
3
■
Loosen
Tighten
261
3-5. Other interior features
■
Loosen
Tighten
■
Pull the lever upwards when lifting the luggage mat up.
The lever can be hooked on the edge of the trunk.
CAUTION
■
When the cargo hooks are not in use
To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their positions when they are not in use.
262
3-5. Other interior features
NOTICE
■
When closing the trunk
Do not leave the luggage mat lever hooked on the edge of the trunk.
The luggage mat may get damaged.
3
263
3-5. Other interior features
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, and security systems, and other devices.
The garage door opener (HomeLink
under license from HomeLink
.
Universal Transceiver) is manufactured
The HomeLink
compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming method below appropriate for the device.
Indicator
Buttons
■
STEP 1
Point the remote control for the device 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) from the HomeLink
control buttons.
Keep the indicator light on the
HomeLink
in view while programming.
264
3-5. Other interior features
STEP 2
Press and hold down one of the buttons on the HomeLink
and the button on the transmitter.
When the indicator light on the
HomeLink
changes from a slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both buttons.
STEP 3
Test the operation of the
HomeLink
by pressing the newly programmed button.
STEP 4
If programming a garage door opener, check to see if the garage door opens and closes. If the garage door does not operate, see if your garage transmitter is of the
Rolling Code type. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink
button. The garage door has the rolling code feature if the indicator light (on the HomeLink
) flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and then remains lit. If your transmitter is the
Rolling Code type, proceed to the heading “Programming a rolling code system”.
Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of the remaining HomeLink
buttons.
3
265
3-5. Other interior features
■
If your device is Rolling Code equipped, follow the steps under the heading “Programming the HomeLink
” before proceeding with the steps listed below.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
Locate the training button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may vary by brand of garage door opener.
Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener for the location of the training button.
Press the training button.
Press and release the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink
button twice. The garage door may open.
If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If the door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third press and release will complete the programming process by opening the garage door.
STEP 4
The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize the HomeLink
transceiver and operate the garage door.
Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system for any of the remaining HomeLink
buttons.
■
STEP
STEP
STEP
STEP
1
2
3
4
Place your transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the surface of the HomeLink
.
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink
in view while programming.
Press and hold the selected HomeLink
button.
Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the device’s remote control button for two seconds each until step 4 is complete.
When the indicator light on the HomeLink
compatible transceiver start to flashing rapidly, release the buttons.
266
3-5. Other interior features
STEP
STEP
5
6
Test the operation of the HomeLink
by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.
Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of the remaining HomeLink
buttons.
■
To program other devices such as home security systems, home door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus dealer for assistance.
■
The individual HomeLink
buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the programming instructions.
3
Press the appropriate HomeLink
button. The HomeLink
indicator light on the HomeLink
transceiver should turn on.
The HomeLink
continues to send a signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.
Press and hold down the 2 outside buttons for 20 seconds until the indicator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the
HomeLink
memory.
267
3-5. Other interior features
■
Before programming
●
Install a new battery in the transmitter.
●
The battery side of the transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink
.
■
Certification for the garage door opener
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of the IC
Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: This transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.
CAUTION
■
When programming a garage door or other remote control device
The garage door may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm.
■
Conforming to federal safety standards
Do not use the HomeLink
Compatible Transceiver with any garage door opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an obstruction object. A door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.
268
3-5. Other interior features
The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which the vehicle is heading.
■
To turn the compass on or off, push “AUTO” for longer than
3 seconds.
Push and hold the button for 3 seconds or more.
■
Display
“N”
“NE”
“E”
“SE”
“S”
“SW”
“W”
“NW”
Direction
North
Northeast
East
Southeast
South
Southwest
West
Northwest
3
269
3-5. Other interior features
The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to the geographic position of the vehicle.
If you cross over a map boundary shown in illustration, the compass will deviate.
To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to the following.
■
STEP 1
Stop the vehicle where it is safe to drive in a circle.
STEP 2
Press “AUTO” until a number (1 to
15) appears on the compass display.
270
STEP 3
Press “AUTO”, and referring to the map above, select the number of the zone where you are.
3-5. Other interior features
STEP 4
Press “AUTO” again.
If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the calibration is complete.
■
If “CAL” appears on the display, drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less in a circle until a direction is displayed.
If there is not enough space to drive in a circle, drive around the block until the direction is displayed.
3
■
Conditions unfavorable to correct operation
The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:
●
The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
●
The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
●
The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection, near a large vehicle, etc.).
●
The vehicle has become magnetized.
(There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)
●
The battery has been disconnected.
●
A door is open.
271
3-5. Other interior features
CAUTION
■
While driving the vehicle
Do not adjust the display. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.
■
When doing the circling calibration
Be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.
NOTICE
■
To avoid the compass malfunctions
Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror.
Doing this may cause a malfunction of the compass sensor.
■
To ensure normal operation of the compass
●
Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.
●
During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.
272
4-1. Maintenance and care ............................... 274
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior.............. 274
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior.............. 277
4-2. Maintenance .................. 280
Maintenance requirements....................... 280
General maintenance ......... 282
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs............................... 285
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ................ 286
Do-it-yourself service precautions ........................... 286
Hood ......................................... 289
Positioning a floor jack ......... 290
Engine compartment............ 292
Tires............................................ 306
Tire inflation pressure ............ 316
4
Wheels...................................... 320
Air conditioning filter ........... 322
Electronic key battery.......... 325
Checking and replacing fuses ........................................ 327
Headlight aim .......................... 341
Light bulbs................................ 342
273
4-1. Maintenance and care
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition.
● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.
Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.
● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.
● Wipe away any water.
● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.
■
Automatic car washes
●
Fold the mirrors back before washing the vehicle.
●
Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your vehicle’s paint.
■
High pressure car washes
●
Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows.
●
Before car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed properly.
■
Aluminum wheels
Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners. Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
■
Bumpers and side moldings
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
274
4-1. Maintenance and care
■
Outside rear view mirror rain-clearing coating
Observe the following precautions in order to retain the rain-clearing properties of the mirror.
●
Clean the mirrors using car shampoo or glass cleaner that does not contain silicone or an abrasive compound, and rinse thoroughly with water.
●
Allow the mirrors to be exposed to direct sunlight for 1 to 2 days.
■
To prevent deterioration and do by corrosion
●
Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
• If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface
• If you see dead insects or insect droppings on the paint
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
●
If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
4
CAUTION
■
Caution about the exhaust pipe
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
275
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■
To protect your vehicle’s painted surfaces
Do not use organic cleaners such as benzene or gasoline.
■
Cleaning the exterior lights
●
Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
●
Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
■
To prevent damage to the windshield wiper arms
When lifting the wiper arms away from the windshield, pull the driver side wiper arm upward first, and repeat for the passenger side. When returning the wipers to their original position, do so from the passenger side first.
■
When using an automatic car wash
“OFF”
Set the wiper switch to “OFF”.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may be damaged.
276
4-1. Maintenance and care
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and keep it in top condition:
■
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
■
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
● Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.
●
Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.
●
Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in shaded and ventilated area.
■
●
Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
●
Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge or soft cloth.
●
Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
4
277
4-1. Maintenance and care
■
Cleaning the inside of the rear window
Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires.
■
Caring for leather areas
Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
■
Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water. The excellent results are obtained when keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
■
Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
CAUTION
■
Water in the vehicle
●
Be careful not to splash or spill liquid on the floor.
●
Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(
Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or severe injury.
278
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■
Cleaning detergents
Do not use organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, acidic or alkaline solutions, dye, bleach or other detergent. Doing so may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.
■
Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces.
●
Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
●
Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
●
Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.
■
Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and may also cause the body to rust.
■
Cleaning the inside of the rear window
Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.
4
279
4-2. Maintenance
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance is essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular checks. Lexus recommends the following maintenance.
■
Should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Lexus dealer.
■
Should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the
“Warranty and Services Guide/Owner’s Manual Supplement/
Scheduled Maintenance”.
■
You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.
The use of Lexus Repair Manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s Guide”,
“Warranty and Services Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or
“Warranty Booklet”.
■
Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repair to ensure performance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.
280
4-2. Maintenance
■
Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer
●
Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle.
●
Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it.
CAUTION
■
If your vehicle is not properly maintained
It could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible serious injury or death.
■
Warning in handling of battery
●
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.
●
Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately.
●
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (
4
281
4-2. Maintenance
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Services Guide” or “Owners
Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for advice.
Battery
Brake fluid
Engine coolant
Items
Engine oil
Exhaust system
Radiator/condenser/hoses
Washer fluid
Check points
Maintenance-free.
(
At the correct level? (
At the correct level? (
At the correct level? (
No fumes or strange sounds?
Not blocked with foreign matter?
(
At the correct level? (
282
4-2. Maintenance
Items
Accelerator pedal
Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism
Brake pedal
Brakes
Head restraints
Indicators/buzzers
Lights
Parking brake
Seat belts
Seats
Check points
• Moves smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching)?
• Can the vehicle be hold securely on an incline with the shift lever in
P?
• Moves smoothly?
• Does it have appropriate clearance and correct amount of free play?
• Not pull to one side when applied?
• Loss of brake effectiveness?
• Spongy feeling brake pedal?
• Pedal almost touches floor?
• Move smoothly and lock securely?
• Function properly?
• Do all the lights come on?
• Headlights aimed correctly?
(
• Moves smoothly?
• Can hold the vehicle securely on an incline?
• Does the seat belt system operate smoothly?
• Are the belts undamaged?
• Do the seat controls operate properly?
4
283
4-2. Maintenance
Steering wheel
Items Check points
• Moves smoothly?
• Has correct free play?
• No strange noises?
Door/trunk
Engine hood
Fluid leaks
Items
Tire
Check points
• Operate smoothly?
• The lock system works properly?
• Is there any leakage after parking?
• Inflation pressure is correct?
• Tire surfaces not worn or damaged?
• Tires rotated according to the maintenance schedule?
• Wheel nuts are not loose?
CAUTION
■
If the engine is running
Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks.
284
4-2. Maintenance
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include
OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.
■
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle.
■
● When the battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set.
●
When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
■
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
■
Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
4
285
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure given in these sections.
Items
Battery condition
Brake fluid level
Engine coolant level
(
)
(
(
Parts and tools
• Warm water
• Baking soda
• Grease
• Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE
J1703 brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid)
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and
50% deionized water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and
45% deionized water.
• Funnel (used only for adding engine coolant)
286
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine oil level
Fuses
Washer fluid
Items
Tire inflation pressure
Headlight aim
Radiator and condenser
(
(
Parts and tools
• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
• Rag or paper towel, funnel (used only for adding engine oil)
• Fuse with same amperage rating as original
(
• Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source
(
P. 341) • Phillips-head screwdriver
(
(
• Water washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)
• Funnel
4
CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe the following precautions.
■
When working on the engine compartment:
●
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.
●
Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
●
Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine compartment.
●
Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.
●
Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.
287
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■
When working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille:
Be sure the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is OFF.
With the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in IGNITION ON mode, the electric cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high.
(
■
Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in the eyes.
NOTICE
■
If you remove the air cleaner:
Driving with the air filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air. Also a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment.
288
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
STEP 1
Pull the hood release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
STEP 2
Lift the auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood.
CAUTION
■
Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
4
289
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly.
Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
■
2WD
AWD
■
290
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■
When raising your vehicle:
Make sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of death or serious injury.
●
Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack such as the one shown in the illustration.
●
Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.
●
Do not put any part of your body or get underneath the vehicle supported only by the floor jack.
Always use automotive jack stands on a solid, level, surface.
●
Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack.
●
Stop the vehicle on level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put the shift lever in P (automatic) or R (manual).
●
Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.
●
Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.
●
When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the floor jack.
4
291
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS350
292
Battery (
Engine oil level dipstick
(
Engine oil filler cap
(
Brake fluid reservoir
(
Fuse boxes (
Washer fluid tank
(
Electric cooling fans
Condenser (
Radiator (
Engine coolant reservoir
(
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
IS250
Battery (
Engine oil level dipstick
(
Engine oil filler cap
(
Brake fluid reservoir
(
Fuse boxes (
Washer fluid tank
(
Electric cooling fans
Condenser (
Radiator (
Engine coolant reservoir
(
4
293
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
Front
Outside
294
■
Press the tip of the clip against a hard surface, such as a desk, to allow the center part of the clip to be pushed up.
Insert
Press
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick.
■
STEP 1
Park the vehicle on level ground. After turning off the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.
STEP 2
Hold a rag under the end and pull the dipstick out.
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level.
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
Low
Full
4
295
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil.
Oil grade
Items
ILSAC multi-grade engine oil
Clean funnel
STEP
STEP
1
2
Remove the oil filler cap.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
STEP 3
Install the filler cap, turning it clockwise.
It takes about 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 lmp.qt.) to raise the oil level from low to full on the dipstick.
296
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
SAE 5W-30 is the best choice for good fuel economy, and good starting in cold weather.
Outside temperature
*: If SAE 5W-30 oil is not available, SAE 10W-30 oil may be used. However, it should be replaced with SAE 5W-30 at the next oil change.
■
Some oil containers are labeled with ILSAC certification marks that help you to select the proper oil.
4
297
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
Engine oil consumption
●
The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.
●
More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and frequent acceleration and deceleration.
●
A new engine consumes more oil.
●
When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately.
●
Oil consumption: Max. 1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 lmp.qt./600 miles (1.0 L per 1000 km)
●
If you consume more than 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 lmp.qt.) every 600 miles (1000 km), contact your Lexus dealer.
■
After changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)
The oil change system should be reset. Perform the following procedures:
STEP 1
Switch the display to the odometer (
P. 130) when the engine is running.
STEP
STEP
2
3
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
While pressing the trip meter reset button, set the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch to the IGNITION ON mode (but do not start the engine because otherwise the reset mode will be cancelled). Continue to press and hold the button until the trip meter displays 000000.
CAUTION
■
Used engine oil
●
Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
●
Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.
Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.
●
Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
298
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■
To prevent serious engine damage:
Check the oil level on regular basis.
■
When replacing the engine oil
●
Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
●
Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
●
Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
●
Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
“FULL”
“LOW”
If the level is on or below the
“LOW” line, add coolant up to the
“FULL” line.
4
299
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant filler cap, radiator cap, drain cock and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer pressure test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system.
■
Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high-quality ethylene glycolbased non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Enabled: -31
F [-35
C])
Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. (Enabled: -44
F [-42
C])
For more details about engine coolant, contact your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■
When the engine is hot
Do not remove the radiator cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing burns or other injuries.
NOTICE
■
When adding engine coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■
If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it damaging parts or paint.
300
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Check the radiator and condenser and clear any foreign objects.
If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■
When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator or condenser, as they may be hot and you may be burned.
■
The brake fluid level should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the tank.
4
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
■
Fluid type
Items
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Clean funnel
■
Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.
301
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■
When filling the reservoir
Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted surfaces.
If fluid gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
NOTICE
■
If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.
Check the battery as follows.
■
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
302
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
Check the battery condition using the indicator color.
Blue: Good condition
White: Charging is necessary.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Red: Not working properly, have the battery checked by your Lexus dealer.
■
Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, before recharging:
●
If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.
●
Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.
■
After recharging the battery
The engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system.
STEP 1
Shift the shift lever to P (automatic) or depress the brake pedal with the shift lever in N (manual).
STEP
STEP
2
3
Open and close any of the doors.
Restart the engine.
4
303
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■
Chemicals in the battery:
A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near battery:
●
Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
●
Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
●
Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
●
Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
●
Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
●
Keep children away from the battery.
■
Where to safety charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.
■
How to recharge the battery
Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a quicker rate.
■
Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
●
If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.
●
If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.
●
If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary.
●
If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Get emergency medical attention immediately.
304
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■
When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.
If any washer does not work or the warning message appears on the multi-information display, the washer tank may be empty. Add washer fluid.
CAUTION
■
When refilling the washer fluid
Do not refill the washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as the washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
4
NOTICE
■
Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
■
Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the washer fluid tank.
305
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear.
■
New tread
Treadwear indicator
Worn tread
The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the “TWI” or
“
” marks, etc., molded on the sidewall of each tire.
Check spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated.
■
2WD models with 16-inch tires and AWD models
Rotate the tires in the order shown.
Front
To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Lexus recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection.
Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure warning system after tire rotation.
2WD models with 18-inch tires
Front
Rotate the tires in the order shown.
To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Lexus recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection.
306
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
2WD models with 17-inch tires
Tires cannot be rotated.
■
Your Lexus is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (
Tire direction marks
The tires listed below are directional. The tire sidewalls are marked with arrows indicating the rolling direction of the tire. If mounted on the wrong side of the vehicle, directional tires will perform poorly.
4
Tire size of turning directional tires
Front
Rear
225/45R17 90W
245/45R17 95W
307
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Lexus dealer. (
■
● When rotating the tires on vehicles differing with front and rear tire inflation pressures.
● When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed.
● When changing the tire size.
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation pressure is set as the pressure benchmark.
308
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
To initialize the system, use the satellite switch. (
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
Park the vehicle in safe place and turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF.
While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed.
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. (
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode.
STEP 4
The tire inflation pressure initialization setting display
Continue to press appears.
or
until the initialization setting display
It may take several minutes to complete the setting. Wait for several minutes before turning the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch to
OFF if necessary.
Recording tire inflation pressure settings
STEP 5
Press and hold the “ON/OFF” button until the tire pressure warning light blinks slowly 3 times and the message “PRESSURE INITIAL” showing that the initial setting is complete is displayed on the multiinformation display.
Wait for a few minutes with the IGNITION ON mode, and then turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
4
309
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
To select tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes, use the satellite switch. (
■
2 sets of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes can be registered. Once a second set of tires is registered at “2ND”, you can switch between tire set settings simply by pressing the tire pressure warning select switch.
There are 2 settings:
“MAIN” position: The ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter on the tires originally installed on the vehicle is registered.
“2ND” position:The ID code is not registered. When you replace a new set of tires, purchase tire pressure warning valves and transmitters from your Lexus dealer and have the new ID code registered by your
Lexus dealer.
■
When replacing tires, make sure to select the ID code set that matches the new tire set. If the tire pressure select switch is set to the wrong tire setting, the tire pressure warning system will not operate properly.
After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.
Tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID code settings display
Press
or
repeatedly until the setting display appears.
Switching ID codes
Press the “ON/OFF” button to switch between “MAIN” and
“2ND” ID codes.
310
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
●
You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric or bulges indicating internal damage
●
A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.
■
Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.
■
Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if they have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■
If the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires
The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.
■
Low profile tires (models not equipped with 16-inch tires)
Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to use snow tires or tire chains
*
on snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather conditions.
*
: Tire chains cannot be mounted on 18-inch tires.
■
Maximum load of tire
Check that the maximum load of the replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross
Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.
As for the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire, and as for the Gross Axle Weight
Ratings (GAWR), see the Certification Label. (
4
311
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
Tire types
1 Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
2 All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.
3 Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires.
If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restriction.
Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (
■
Initializing the tire pressure warning system
Initialize the tires with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified level.
■
When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed
Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
●
When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning light does not flash 3 times and the setting message does not appear on the multi-information display.
●
After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute then stays on after driving for about 20 minutes.
312
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks.
■
Tire pressure warning system certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
●
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
●
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
●
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
●
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
4
313
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■
When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to fatal or injury accidents.
●
Do not mix tires of different makes, models, tread patterns or treadwear.
●
Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus.
●
Do not mix radial, bias-belted, or bias-ply tires.
●
Do not mix summer, all season and winter tires.
■
When initializing the tire pressure warning system
Do not press the satellite switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.
NOTICE
■
Repairing or replacing tires, wheels and tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■
To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.
314
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■
Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or pot holes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.
■
Low profile tires and wheels
Wheels with profile tires like 17- and 18-inch tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel when receiving impact from the road surface. Therefore pay attention to the following:
●
Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated, they may be damaged more severely.
●
Avoid pot holes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards.
Failure to do so can lead to severe tire and wheel damage.
■
If tire inflation pressures become low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
4
315
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is displayed on the tire and loading information label. (
316
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
Remove the tire valve cap.
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.
If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended levels, adjust the pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to lower.
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.
Reinstall the tire valve cap.
4
■
Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
317
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
●
Reduced fuel efficiency
●
Reduced driving comfort and tire life
●
Reduced safety
●
Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
■
Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
●
Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.
●
Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.
●
Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.
●
Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.
318
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■
Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury.
●
Excessive wear
●
Uneven wear
●
Poor handling
●
Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
●
Poor sealing of the tire bead
●
Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
●
A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
NOTICE
■
When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have been lost, replace them as soon as possible.
4
319
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of handling control.
■
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.
Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.
Lexus does not recommend using:
• Wheels of different sizes or types
• Used wheels
• Bent wheels that have been straightened
■
● Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your aluminum wheels.
● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.
● Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
■
When replacing wheels
The wheels of your Lexus are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (
320
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■
When replacing wheels
●
Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the
Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.
●
Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.
Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■
Replacing tire inflation pressure warning valves and transmitters
●
Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer.
●
Ensure that only Genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with nongenuine wheels.
4
321
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
The air conditioning filter must be cleaned or changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.
■
STEP 1
Set the air conditioning system to recirculated mode.
The air conditioning filter case cannot be removed with the system in the outside air mode.
STEP 2
STEP 3
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
Open the glove box. Lift and remove the partition.
STEP 4
Remove the filter cover.
STEP 5
Remove the filter case.
322
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
■
If the filter is dirty, clean by blowing compressed air through the filter from the downward side.
Hold the air gun 2 in. (5 cm) from the filter and blow for approximately 2 minutes at
72 psi (500 kPa, 5.0 kgf/cm
2 or bar).
If it is not available, have the filter cleaned by your Lexus dealer.
Remove the air conditioning filter from the filter case and replace it with a new one.
The “
UP” marks shown on the filter and the filter case should be pointing up.
4
■
Checking interval
Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner's
Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.)
■
If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
323
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■
To prevent damage to the system
●
When using the air conditioning system, make sure that a filter is always installed.
●
When cleaning the filter, do not clean the filter with water.
324
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.
■
● Flathead screwdriver
● Small Phillips-head screwdriver
● Lithium battery (CR1632)
■
STEP 1
Take out the mechanical key.
STEP 2
Remove the cover.
4
STEP 3
Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal facing up.
325
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
If the electronic key battery is discharged
The following symptoms may occur.
●
The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will not function properly.
●
The operational range is reduced.
■
Use a CR1632 lithium battery
●
Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, jewelers, or camera stores.
●
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Lexus dealer.
●
Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
CAUTION
■
Removed battery and other parts
Keep away from children.
These parts are small and if swallowed by a child they can cause choking.
NOTICE
■
For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
●
Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
●
Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control.
●
Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
326
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown.
If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
STEP
STEP
STEP
1
2
3
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
Remove the engine compartment cover. (
Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment (type A)
Push the tabs in and lift the lid off.
Engine compartment (type B)
Push the tabs in and lift the lid off.
4
327
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Driver's side instrument panel
Remove the lid.
Passenger's side instrument panel
Remove the lid.
STEP 4
STEP 5
After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings”
(
P. 331) for details about which fuse to check.
Remove the fuse with the pullout tool.
328
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 6
Check if the fuse has blown.
Type A
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.
Type B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.
4
Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Lexus dealer.
329
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Type D
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Lexus dealer.
Lift the lid off while pushing the tabs on either side.
330
■
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
Fuse
ABS NO.3
PWR HTR
TURN-HAZ
IG2 MAIN
RAD NO.2
D/C CUT
RAD NO.1
8
9
MPX-B
DOME
Ampere
25 A
25 A
15 A
20 A
30 A
20 A
30 A
10 A
10 A
VDIM
Circuit
Emergency flashers, turn signals
IG2, IGN, GAUGE
Audio
DOME, MPX-B
Audio
Headlights, front fog lights, parking lights, license plate lights, windshield washer, horn, power door lock system, power windows, power seats, electric tilt and telescopic steering column, meter, smart access system with pushbutton start, outside rear view mirrors, air conditioning system, security system
Interior lights, meter
4
331
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
22
23
24
25
332
26
Fuse
10
E/G-B
11
12
DIESEL GLW
ABS1
13
RH J/B-B
14
MAIN
15
STARTER
16
LH J/B-B
17
P/I-B
18
EPS
19
20
21
ALT
GLW PLG1
RH J/B-AM
ABS2
DEFOG
FAN2
FAN1
HEATER
Ampere
60 A
80 A
50 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
60 A
80 A
150 A
50 A
80 A
30 A
50 A
40 A
40 A
50 A
Circuit
FR CTRL-B, ETCS, ALT-S, steering lock system, exhaust system
VSC, VDIM
Power door lock system, smart access system with push-button start
Headlight low beams
Smart access system with push-button start
Power door lock system, SECURITY
Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system
Power steering
LH J/B-AM, E/G-AM, GLW PLG2,
HEATER, FAN1, FAN2, DEFOG,
ABS2, RH J/B-AM, GLW PLG1,
LH J/B-B, RH J/B-B
PTC heater
OBD, STOP SW, TI&TE, FR P/SEAT
RH, RAD NO.3, ECU-IG RH,
RH-IG, FR S/HTR RH, ACC, CIG,
PWR OUTLET
VSC
Rear window defogger
Electric cooling fans
Electric cooling fans
Air conditioning system
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
27
Fuse
GLW PLG2
28
E/G-AM
29
LH J/B-AM
Ampere
50 A
60 A
80 A
Circuit
PTC heater
Headlight cleaners, front fog lights, parking lights, air conditioning system
S/ROOF, FR P/SEAT LH, TV NO.1,
A/C, FUEL/OPEN, PSB, FR WIP,
H-LP LVL, LH-IG, ECU-IG LH,
PANEL, TAIL, MIR HTR,
FR S/HTR LH
4
333
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
1
2
Fuse
FR CTRL-B
A/F
3
ETCS
6
7
4
5
8
ALT-S
STR LOCK
H-LP CLN
A/C COMP
DEICER
9
FR CTRL-AM
334
12
13
10
11
IG2
EFI NO.2
H-LP R LWR
H-LP L LWR
30 A
10 A
10 A
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
25 A
30 A
7.5 A
25 A
Ampere
25 A
15 A
10 A
Circuit
Headlight high beam, horn
Exhaust system
Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system
Charging system
Steering lock
Headlight cleaner
Air conditioning system
Front fog lights, parking lights, windshield washer
Ignition system
Fuel system, exhaust system
Headlight low beam (right)
Headlight low beam (left)
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
14
Fuse
F/PMP
15
EFI
16
INJ
17
18
19
20
21
H-LP UPR
HORN
WASHER
FR TAIL
FR FOG
Ampere
25 A
25 A
20 A
15 A
10 A
20 A
10 A
15 A
Circuit
Fuel system
Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system
Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system
Headlight high beams
Horns
Windshield washer
Parking lights
Front fog lights
4
335
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
336
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Fuse
FR P/SEAT LH
A/C
MIR HTR
TV NO.1
FUEL OPEN
TV NO.2
PSB
S/ROOF
9
TAIL
10
PANEL
11
RR FOG
12
13
ECU-IG LH
FR S/HTR LH
Ampere
30 A
7.5 A
15 A
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
30 A
25 A
10 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
Circuit
Power seat
Air conditioning system
Outside rear view mirror defoggers
Display
Fuel filler door opener
Pre-collision seat belt
Electric moon roof
Tail lights, license plate lights, parking lights
Switch illumination, air conditioning system, display
10 A
15 A
Cruise control, air conditioning system, power steering, rain sensor, antiglare inside rear view mirror, shift lock system, moon roof, tire inflation pressure warning system
Seat heaters and ventilators
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
14
15
Fuse
RR DOOR LH
FR DOOR LH
16
SECURITY
17
H-LP LVL
18
19
LH-IG
FR WIP
Ampere
20 A
20 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
30 A
Power windows
Power windows
Circuit
Smart access system with push-button start
AFS
Charging system, headlight cleaner, rear window defogger, electric cooling fans, emergency flashers, turn signal lights, back-up lights, stop lights, mirror heaters, sun shade, seat belts,
Intuitive parking assist, cruise control, air conditioning system, PTC heater
Windshield wipers
4
337
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
338
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
TI & TE
RAD NO.3
GAUGE
IGN
Fuse
FR P/SEAT RH
DOOR DL
OBD
STOP SW
ACC
10
11
12
CIG
PWR OUTLET
RR DOOR RH
Ampere
30 A
15 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
20 A
10 A
7.5 A
10 A
7.5 A
15 A
15 A
20 A
Power seat
Circuit
On-board diagnosis system
Stop lights
Electric tilt and telescopic steering column
Audio
Meter
SRS airbag system, cruise control, steering lock system, fuel system
Lexus link system, clock, air conditioning system, audio, display, outside rear view mirrors, smart access system with push-button start
Cigarette lighter
Power outlet
Power windows
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
13
FR DOOR RH
14
AM2
15
16
17
RH-IG
FR S/HTR RH
ECU-IG RH
Ampere
20 A
15 A
7.5 A
15 A
10 A
Circuit
Power windows, outside rear view mirrors
Smart access system with push-button start
Seat belts, intuitive parking assist, automatic transmission, seat heater and ventilator
Seat heaters and ventilators
Power seats, smart access system with push-button start, AWD system, outside rear view mirrors, VDIM, VSC, air conditioning system, pre-collision seat belt, electric tilt and telescopic steering, power windows, navigation system
4
■
After a fuse is replaced
●
If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. (
●
If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■
If there is an overload in the circuits
The fuses are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is damaged.
339
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■
To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
●
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.
●
Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any other object in place of a fuse.
●
Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
This can cause extensive damage or even fire.
●
Do not modify fuses or the fuse box.
NOTICE
■
Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus dealer.
340
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
Adjustment bolt A
Adjustment bolt B
■
STEP 1
Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of gas and the area around the headlight is not deformed.
STEP
STEP
STEP
2
3
4
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Sit in the driver’s seat.
Bounce the vehicle several times.
■
STEP 1
Turn bolt A in either direction using a Phillips-head screwdriver.
Remember the turning direction and the number of turns in mind.
4
STEP 2
Turn bolt B the same number of turns and in the same direction as step 1 using a Phillips-head screwdriver.
If the error is over the value specified above, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer to adjust the headlight aim.
341
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
You may replace the following bulbs yourself. For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your Lexus dealer.
■
Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (
■
■
Parking light
Headlight high beam
■
342
Back-up light
Rear turn signal light
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
STEP 1
Release the lock and remove the cover.
STEP 2
STEP 3
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
4
Unplug the connector while depressing the lock release.
343
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
STEP 1
Release the lock and remove the cover.
STEP 2
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
STEP 3
Remove the light bulb.
344
■
STEP 1
Open the trunk door and remove the trunk panel cover clips.
STEP 2
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Partly remove the trunk panel cover and turn bulb bases counterclockwise.
Remove the light bulb.
STEP 3
■
STEP 1
Open the trunk door and remove the cover.
4
STEP 2
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
345
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 3
Remove the light bulb.
■
If any of the bulbs listed below has burnt out, have your Lexus dealer replace it.
● Headlight low beams (halogen bulbs)
● Headlight high and low beams (discharge bulbs)
● Front fog lights
● Front turn signal lights
● Front side marker lights
●
Stop/tail lights
● Tail lights
● Rear side marker lights
●
High mounted stoplight
● License plate lights
346
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
When replacing the front left headlight and parking light bulbs
Remove the securing bolt and move the washer fluid filler opening to allow easy access to the light bulbs.
After replacing the bulbs, make sure to secure the washer fluid filler opening with the bolt.
■
Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations. Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction.
●
Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.
●
Water has built up inside the headlight.
■
Discharge headlights (if equipped)
If voltage to the discharge bulbs is insufficient, the bulbs may not come on, or may go out temporarily. The discharge bulbs will come on when normal power is restored.
4
347
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■
Replacing light bulbs
●
Turn off the headlights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning off the headlights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
●
Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by the plastic or metal portion.
If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack.
●
Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
●
Do not attempt to take apart or repair the low beam headlight bulbs, connectors, power supply circuits, or related components.
Doing so could result in electric shock and serious injury or death.
■
Discharge headlights (if equipped)
●
Contact your Lexus dealer before replacing discharge headlights (including light bulbs).
●
Do not touch the high-intensity discharge headlight’s high voltage socket when the headlights are turned on.
An extremely high voltage of 20000 V will be discharged and could result in serious injury or death by electric shock.
■
To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
348
5-1. Essential information................... 350
If your vehicle needs to be towed ..................................... 350
If you think something is wrong ...................................... 356
Fuel pump shut off system ..................................... 357
Event data recorder ............. 358
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency.................... 360
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer
sounds... ................................ 360
If a warning message is displayed................................ 369
If you have a flat tire.............. 382
If the engine will not start...... 391
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P........................ 392
If you lose your keys............... 393
If the electronic key does not operate properly.......... 394
5
If the vehicle battery is discharged ............................ 397
If your vehicle overheats............................... 400
If the vehicle becomes stuck........................................ 402
349
5-1. Essential information
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your
Lexus dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or a flat bed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws.
If towing from the rear, the vehicle’s front wheels and axles must be in good condition. (
If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck.
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your Lexus dealer before towing.
●
The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move.
●
The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing eyelet(s). This should only attempted on hard, surfaced roads for short distances at low speeds.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.
Towing eyelets
350
5-1. Essential information
■
Emergency towing procedure
STEP 1
Release the parking brake.
STEP 2
STEP 3
Shift the shift lever to N.
Put the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY mode (engine off) or IGNITION ON mode (engine running).
CAUTION
■
Caution while towing
●
Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelets and the cables or chains.
●
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.
NOTICE
■
To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission
(vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground.
This may cause serious damage to the transmission.
■
When towing a vehicle without using a towing dolly
(vehicles with a manual transmission)
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch must not be OFF.
5
351
5-1. Essential information
STEP 1
STEP 2
Remove the eyelet cover using a flat head screwdriver.
To protect the bodywork, place a rag between the screwdriver and the vehicle body, as shown in the illustration.
Insert the towing eyelet into the hole and tighten partially by hand.
STEP 3
Tighten down the towing eyelet securely using a wheel nut wrench.
■
Location of the emergency towing eyelet
352
5-1. Essential information
CAUTION
■
Installing towing eyelets to the vehicle
Make sure that towing eyelets are installed securely.
If not securely installed, towing eyelets may come loose during towing. This may lead to accidents that cause serious injury or even death.
NOTICE
■
To prevent body damage
Do not tow with a sling type truck, either from the front or rear.
5
353
5-1. Essential information
From the front
Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.
Vehicles with a manual transmissions: We recommend to use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.
When not using a towing dolly, release the parking brake and shift the shift lever to N.
From the rear (2WD models)
Switch to ACCESSORY mode so that the steering wheel is unlocked.
From the rear (AWD models)
Use a towing dolly under the front wheel.
354
5-1. Essential information
NOTICE
■
To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission
(vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground.
■
To prevent damaging the vehicle
●
Do not tow the vehicle from the rear with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
OFF.
The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheel straight.
●
When raising the vehicle from the rear, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed from the rear.
If your Lexus is transported by a flat bed truck, it should be tied down at the locations shown in the illustration.
5
If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45
.
Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged.
355
5-1. Essential information
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■
● Fluid leaks under the vehicle
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal
■
● Changes in exhaust sound
● Excessive tire squeal when cornering
● Strange noises related to the suspension system
● Pinging or other noises related to the engine
■
● Engine missing, stumbling or running rough
● Appreciable loss of power
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor
356
5-1. Essential information
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to the engine.
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated.
STEP
STEP
1
2
Switch to ACCESSORY mode or OFF.
Restart the engine.
NOTICE
■
Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked on to the ground, the fuel system has been damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.
5
357
5-1. Essential information
Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance.
Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is an event data recorder (EDR) that records data in a crash or a near car crash event.
The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a crash or a near car crash event, this device may record some or all of the following information:
●
Engine speed
●
Whether the brake pedal was applied or not
●
Vehicle speed
●
To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
●
Position of the transmission shift lever
●
Whether the driver and front passenger wore seat belts or not
●
Driver's seat position
●
SRS airbag deployment data
●
SRS airbag system diagnostic data
●
Front passenger’s occupant classification
The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data recorders, the EDR does not record sound data such as conversation between passengers.
358
5-1. Essential information
Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:
●
An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the leasing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained
●
Officially requested by the police or other authorities
●
Used as a defense for Lexus in a law suit
● Ordered by a court law
However, if necessary Lexus will:
●
Use the data for research on Lexus vehicle safety performance
● Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing details of the vehicle owner, and only when it is deemed necessary
● Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification information to a non-Lexus organization for research purposes
5
359
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn on or flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
Warning light
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Warning light/Details
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)
*
• Low brake fluid
• Malfunction in the brake booster system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released the system is operating normally.
360
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
Warning light Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.
Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Warning light
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Warning light/Details
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The electronic engine control system;
• The electronic throttle control system; or
• The electronic automatic transmission control system.
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system.
5
361
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Warning light/Details
“ABS” warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The ABS;
• The brake assist system.
Electric power steering system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system.
Pre-collision system warning light (if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light turns off.
Warning light
(On the instrument cluster)
Warning light/Details
Open door warning light
(warning buzzer)
*
1
Indicates that a door or a trunk is not fully closed.
Low fuel level warning light
Remaining fuel
(Approximately 2.9 gal. [11 L,
2.4 Imp.gal.] or less)
Driver’s seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)
*
2
Warns the driver to fasten his/her seat belt.
Correction procedure
Check that all doors and the trunk are closed.
Refuel the vehicle.
Fasten the seat belt.
362
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
(On the center panel)
Warning light/Details
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
(warning buzzer)
*
2
Warns the front passenger to fasten his/her seat belt.
Correction procedure
Fasten the seat belt.
Tire pressure warning light
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure
When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute:
Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system
Adjust the tire inflation pressure.
Have the system checked by your Lexus dealer.
Master warning light
A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction.
1
2
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts reminder sounds to alert the driver and front passenger that his or her sear belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds intermittently for 10 seconds after the vehicle has reached a speed of at least 12 mph (20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.
5
363
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
●
Is the fuel empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
●
Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The lamp will go off after taking several driving trips.
If the lamp does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■
Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder and warning buzzer
●
If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound, even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.
●
If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the warning light may not operate properly.
■
When the tire pressure warning light comes on
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pressing the satellite switch does not turn off the tire pressure warning light.
■
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).
■
When a tires is replaced with a spare tire
The compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn off after a few minutes.
364
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■
If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative
The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
●
If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used
●
If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered in the tire pressure warning computer
●
If a different set of tires has been selected using the satellite switch.
●
If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm
2
or bar) or higher
The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
●
If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby
●
If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle
●
If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the wheels or wheel housings
●
If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used (Even if you use Lexus wheels, the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires.)
●
If tire chains are used
■
If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently
If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
5
365
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■
If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
●
Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.
●
If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If the tire is flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Lexus dealer.
●
Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
■
If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
366
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■
Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and loading information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and loading information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly.
5
367
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■
Precaution when installing a different tire
When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.
368
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and perform the following actions:
Master warning light
The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multi-information display.
Multi-information display
If any of the warning light turns on again after performing the following actions, contact your Lexus dealer.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
5
Warning message Details
Indicates an abnormal engine oil pressure.
The warning light may turn on if the engine oil pressure is too low.
(Flashing)
369
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Warning message Details
Indicates a malfunction in the AWD system.
(If equipped)
(Flashing and then
continuously on)
Indicates a malfunction in the tire pressure warning system. (
The tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute.
(Flashing)
Indicates a malfunction in the steering lock system.
370
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Details Warning message
Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system.
(If equipped)
Indicates intuitive parking assist malfunction.
The malfunctioning assist-sensor is shown flashing on the display.
(If equipped)
(Flashing)
Indicates a malfunction in the radar cruise control system.
5
(If equipped)
371
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Failing to investigate the cause of the following warning may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Warning message Details
Indicates a malfunction in the TRAC, VSC or hillstart assist control systems.
372
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning message turns off.
Warning message Details Correction procedure
Indicates that one or more of the doors is not fully closed.
The system also indicates which doors are not fully closed.
flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that one or more of the doors is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
Make sure that all of the doors are closed.
Indicates that the hood is not fully closed.
flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that hood is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
Close the hood.
5
373
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
(Flashing)
Details
Indicates that the trunk is not fully closed.
flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the parking brake is still engaged
(with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
Correction procedure
flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that trunk is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
Close the trunk.
Indicates that the moon roof is not fully closed
(with the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF and the driver’s door opened).
Indicates that the parking brake is still engaged.
Close the moon roof.
Release the parking brake.
Indicates that the washer fluid level is low.
Add washer fluid.
374
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message Details Correction procedure
Indicates that engine oil level is low.
Check the level of engine oil, and add if necessary.
(U.S.A. only)
(U.S.A. only)
Indicates that the engine oil is scheduled to be changed.
Comes on approximately
4500 miles (7200 km) after the engine oil is changed. (The indicator will not work properly unless the oil maintenance data has been reset.)
Indicates that the engine oil should be changed.
Check the engine oil, and change if necessary.
Comes on approximately
5000 miles (8000 km) after the engine oil is changed (and the oil maintenance data has been reset).
Check and change the engine oil.
5
375
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message Details Correction procedure
Indicates low tire inflation pressure.
Check the tire inflation pressure, and adjust to the appropriate level.
(Flashing)
Indicates that the precollision system is not currently functional.
Clean the grille and the sensor.
This message appears when the pre-collision system is hot. In this case, wait until the system cools down.
(If equipped)
Indicates that intuitive parking assist is dirty or covered with ice.
Clean the sensor.
(If equipped)
376
(Flashing)
Indicates that the radar cruise control sensor is dirty or covered with ice.
Clean the sensor.
(If equipped)
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message Details Correction procedure
(Flashing and then continuously on)
(Flashing)
Indicates that the radar cruise control system is unable to judge vehicleto-vehicle distance.
• Switch the driving mode to either the normal or power mode.
• If the windshield wipers are on, turn them off or set them to either the intermittent or the slow mode.
(If equipped)
(Flashing)
(If equipped)
Indicates that your vehicle is nearing the vehicle ahead (in radar cruise mode).
Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes.
■
Changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)
Make sure to reset the oil change system. (
■
Warning light display in radar cruise mode
In the following cases, the warning light may not be displayed even if vehicle-tovehicle distance closes.
●
When your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are traveling at the same speed or the vehicle ahead is traveling more quickly than your vehicle
●
When the vehicle ahead is traveling at a very low speed
●
Immediately after cruise control speed is set
●
At the instant the accelerator pedal is depressed
5
377
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light turns off.
Interior buzzer
Exterior buzzer
Once
Once 3 times
Warning message
(Comes on for 10 seconds.)
(Flashing)
(Flashing)
Details
Correction procedure
Indicates that an attempt was made to start the engine without the electronic key being present, or the electronic key was not functioning normally.
Indicates that a door other than the driver’s door has been opened or closed with the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch in any mode other than OFF and the electronic key outside of the detection area.
Start the engine with the electronic key present.
*
Confirm the location of the electronic key.
378
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior buzzer
Once
Exterior buzzer
Continuous
Warning message
Once 3 times
(Vehicles with an automatic transmission)
(Flashing)
(Displayed alternately)
(Vehicles with an automatic transmission)
(Flashing)
Details
Correction procedure
Indicates that the driver’s door has been opened or closed with the shift lever in P, the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch in any mode other than OFF and the electronic key outside of the detection area.
Indicates that the driver’s door has been opened or closed (with the shift lever out of in
P, the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch in any mode other than
OFF and the electronic key outside of the detection area).
Turn the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch
OFF or confirm the location of the electronic key.
• Shift the shift lever to P.
• Confirm the location of the electronic key.
5
Once
Indicates that the key battery is low.
Replace the battery. (
(Flashing)
379
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior buzzer
Exterior buzzer
Once
Once
Once
Warning message
(Vehicles with an automatic transmission)
(Vehicles with a manual transmission)
(Flashing)
Details
Correction procedure
Indicates that a door has been opened or closed and the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch has been switched twice to
ACCESSORY mode from OFF.
Indicates that a door has been opened or closed and the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch has been switched twice to
ACCESSORY mode from OFF.
Press the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch while applying the brakes.
Press the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch while depressing the clutch pedal.
Indicates that the steering lock has not released within 3 seconds of pressing the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch.
Press the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch again while turning the steering wheel with the brake pedal depressed.
380
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior buzzer
Exterior buzzer
Warning message Details
Correction procedure
Once
(Vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Indicates that the electronic key does not operate properly.
(Vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Once
(Vehicles with a manual transmission)
Indicates that the electronic key does not operate properly.
(Vehicles with a manual transmission)
*: If the engine does not start when the electronic key is inside the vehicle, the electronic key battery may be depleted or there may be difficulties receiving the signal from the key. (
5
381
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.
■
● Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
● Set the parking brake.
● Shift the shift lever to P (automatic) or R (manual).
● Stop the engine.
● Turn on the emergency flashers.
■
Jack handle
Jack
Tighten Loosen
Tool bag
(including towing eyelet)
Spare tire
382
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 1
Lift up the hook of the panel on the trunk floor.
STEP 2
Secure the panel using the hook provided.
STEP 3
Loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire.
5
383
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 1
STEP 2
Chock the tires.
Front
Rear
Flat tire
Left-hand side
Righthand side
Left-hand side
Righthand side
Wheel chock positions
Behind the rear righthand side tire
Behind the rear lefthand side tire
In front of the front righthand side tire
In front of the front lefthand side tire
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one turn).
STEP 3
Turn the tire jack portion “A” by hand until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point.
384
STEP 4
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground.
STEP 5
Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire.
When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface.
STEP 1
Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface.
If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, and the tire may come off the vehicle.
5
385
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 2
STEP 3
Tapered portion
Disc wheel sheet
Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each nut by hand to approximately the same amount.
Tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel sheet.
Lower the vehicle.
STEP 4
Firmly tighten each nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration.
Tightening torque:
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
STEP 5
Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.
386
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■
The compact spare tire
●
The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” on the tire sidewall.
Use the compact spare tire temporarily only in an emergency.
●
Make sure to check the tire pressure of the compact spare tire. (
■
When using the compact spare tire
As the compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be warned. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.
■
If you have a flat rear tire on a road covered with snow or ice
Install the compact spare tire on the front of the vehicle. Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the rear tires.
STEP
STEP
STEP
1
2
3
Replace a front tire with the compact spare tire.
Replace the flat rear tire with the tire removed from the front of the vehicle.
Fit tire chains to the rear tires.
■
After completing the tire change
The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (
5
387
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■
Using the tire jack
Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or injuries due to the vehicle suddenly falling off the jack.
●
Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and removing tire chains.
●
Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle.
●
Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.
●
Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack.
●
Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.
●
Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.
●
When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
●
Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.
●
Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or near the vehicle may be injured.
■
Replacing a flat tire
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
●
Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
The oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen, causing a serious accident.
Remove any oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
●
Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5
kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
Failure to follow these precautions could cause the nuts to loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
388
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■
When using the compact spare tire
●
Remember that your compact spare tire is specifically designed for use with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle.
●
Do not use two compact spare tires simultaneously.
●
Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.
●
Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp cornering.
■
Speed limit when using the compact spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle.
The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failing to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
■
When the compact spare tire attached
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly:
●
ABS & brake assist
●
VSC
●
TRAC
●
Navigation system (if equipped)
Also, not only can the following system not be utilized fully, it may actually negatively effect the drive-train components:
●
AWD system
5
389
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■
Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire.
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair.
■
Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the vehicle.
The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces.
■
Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire
Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.
■
When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■
To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.
390
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the engine will not start, even though correct starting procedures are being followed (
P. 117), consider each of the following points.
■
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
● The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting procedures. (
● There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.
(
■
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
● The battery may be discharged. (
● The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
■
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
● One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
● The battery may be discharged. (
● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.
Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.
5
391
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever can be shifted.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
Set the parking brake.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY mode.
Depress the brake pedal.
Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent.
STEP 5
Press the shift lock override button.
The shift lever can be shifted while the button is pressed.
392
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
New genuine Lexus keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using the other key and the key number stamped on your key number plate.
393
5
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted
(
P. 26) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is
depleted, the smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk can be opened or the engine can be started by following the procedure below.
Doors
Remove the cover on the driver’s door handle using the mechanical key in order to perform the following operations.
Locks all doors
Closes the windows/moon roof
(turn and hold)
Unlocks the door
Turning the key rearward unlocks the driver's door. Turning the key once again unlocks the other doors.
Opens the windows/moon roof
(turn and hold)
Return the cover to the original position after use.
394
Trunk
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Turn the mechanical key clockwise to open.
Automatic transmission
STEP 1
Shift the shift lever to P and apply the brakes.
STEP 2
Touch the Lexus emblem side of the electronic key to the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch.
STEP 3
An alarm will sound to indicate that the start function cannot detect the electronic key that is touched to the “ENGINE START STOP” switch if any of the doors is opened and closed while the key is touched to the switch.
To change “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes: Within 10 seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the brake pedal and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. Modes can be changed each time the switch is pressed.
(
To start the engine: Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch within 10 seconds after the buzzer sounds, keeping the brake pedal depressed.
5
395
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Manual transmission
STEP 1
Shift the shift lever to N and depress the clutch pedal.
STEP 2
Touch the Lexus emblem side of the electronic key to the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch.
An alarm will sound to indicate that the start function cannot detect the electronic key that is touched to the “ENGINE START STOP” switch if any of the doors is opened and closed while the key is touched to the switch.
STEP 3
To change “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes: Within 10 seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the clutch pedal and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. Modes can be changed each time the switch is pressed.
(
To start the engine: Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch within 10 seconds after the buzzer sounds, keeping the clutch pedal depressed.
In the event that the engine still cannot be started, contact your Lexus dealer.
■
Stopping the engine
For vehicles with an automatic transmission: Shift the shift lever to P and press the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch as you normally do when stopping the engine.
For vehicles with a manual transmission: Shift the shift lever to N position and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch as you normally do when stopping the engine.
■
Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is the temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery depletes.
(
396
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle’s battery is discharged.
You can call your Lexus dealer, or qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Lexus following the steps below.
STEP 1
Remove the engine compartment covers.
(
STEP 2
Connecting the jumper cables.
If required, remove all vent plugs from the booster battery. Lay a cloth over the open vents on the booster battery. (This helps reduce the explosion hazard, personal injuries and burns.)
Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle
Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in the illustration.
STEP
STEP
3
4
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.
Open and close any of the doors with the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF.
5
397
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP
STEP
5
6
Maintain the engine speed on the second vehicle and turn the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode, then start the vehicle’s engine.
Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order in which they were connected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■
Avoiding a discharged battery
●
Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off.
●
Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.
■
When the battery is removed or discharged
The power windows must be initialized. (
CAUTION
■
Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the battery.
●
Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended terminal.
●
Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” terminals.
●
Do not allow open flame or use matches, cigarette lighters or smoke near the battery.
398
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■
Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery.
●
When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.
●
Do not lean over the battery
●
In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received.
●
Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts.
●
Do not allow children near the battery.
NOTICE
■
To prevent damaging the vehicle
Do not pull- or push-start the vehicle, because the three-way catalytic converter may overheat and become a fire hazard.
■
When handling jumper cables
Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fan or any of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.
5
399
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your engine overheats:
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the automatic air conditioning system.
Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood.
If you see steam:
Stop the engine and carefully lift the hood.
If you do not see steam:
Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood.
Remove the engine compartment cover. (
Check to see if the cooling fan is operating.
If the fan is operating:
Wait until the temperature of the engine (shown on the instrument cluster) begins to fall and then stop the engine.
If the fan is not operating:
Stop the engine immediately and call your local Lexus dealer.
After the engine has cooled down sufficiently, check the engine coolant level and inspect the radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.
400
STEP 6
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Add engine coolant if required.
Water can be used in an emergency measure if engine coolant is unavailable. (
Have the vehicle checked at your nearest Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■
Overheating
If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating.
●
The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of power is experienced.
●
Steam is coming from under the hood.
CAUTION
■
To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle
●
Keep hands and clothing away from the fan and other belts while the engine is running.
●
Do not loosen the radiator cap while the engine and radiator are hot.
Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released under pressure.
5
NOTICE
■
When adding engine coolant
Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.
When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine.
401
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and put the selector lever in P (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or N (vehicles with a manual transmission).
Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire.
Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide traction under the tires.
Restart the engine.
Shift the shift lever to the D or R position (automatic) or 1 or R position (manual) and carefully apply the accelerator to free the vehicle.
Turn off TRAC and VSC if these functions are hampering your attempts to free the vehicle. (
CAUTION
■
When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons. The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.
■
When shifting the shift lever
With automatic transmission vehicles, be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.
402
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■
To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
●
Avoid spinning the wheels and do not rev the engine.
●
If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may require towing to be freed.
5
403
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
404
6
6-1. Specifications................. 406
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)......................... 406
Fuel information...................... 421
Tire information...................... 424
6-2. Customization................ 436
Customizable features ........ 436
6-3. Initialization .................... 441
Items to initialize ..................... 441
405
6-1. Specifications
Overall length
Overall width
180.1 in. (4575 mm)
70.9 in. (1800 mm)
Overall height
* 1
2WD models
AWD models
56.1 in. (1425 mm)
56.7 in. (1440 mm)
Wheelbase
Tread
Front
Rear
107.4 in. (2730 mm)
60.4 in. (1535 mm)
60.0 in. (1525 mm)*
2
60.4 in. (1535 mm)*
3
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage)
825 lb. (375 kg)
*
*
*
1
: Unladen vehicle
2
: Vehicle with 255/40R18 tires
3
: Vehicle with tires other than the above
406
6-1. Specifications
■
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel and in the engine compartment.
This number is also on the Certification Label.
6
407
6-1. Specifications
■
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.
408
6-1. Specifications
Model
Type
Bore and stroke
Displacement
Drive belt tension
Fuel type
Octane rating
Fuel tank capacity
IS250
4GR-FSE
6-cylinder V type,
4-cycle, gasoline
3.27
3.03 in.
(83.0
77.0 mm)
152.5 cu.in.
(2500 cm
3
)
Automatic adjustment
IS350
2GR-FSE
6-cylinder V type,
4-cycle, gasoline
3.70
3.27 in.
(94.0
83.0 mm)
210.9 cu.in.
(3456 cm
3
)
Unleaded gasoline only
91 (Research octane number 96) or higher
17.2 gal. (65 L, 14.3 lmp.gal.)
6
409
6-1. Specifications
Oil capacity
(drain and refill) with filter
2WD models
AWD models without filter
2WD models
AWD models
Oil grade
IS250 IS350
6.6 qt. (6.3 L, 5.5 lmp.qt.)
6.8 qt. (6.4 L, 5.7 lmp.qt.)
6.6 qt. (6.3 L, 5.5 lmp.qt.)
6.2 qt. (5.9 L, 5.2 lmp.qt.)
6.3 qt. (6.0 L, 5.3 lmp.qt.)
6.2 qt. (5.9 L, 5.2 lmp.qt.)
ILSAC multi-grade engine oil
Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the grade and viscosity shown below.
Recommended oil viscosity
Outside temperature
*
:5W-30 is an oil that provides optimal levels of fuel efficiency.
Oil viscosity
● The 5W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
● The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load condition.
410
6-1. Specifications
Capacity
Coolant type
9.6 qt.
(9.1 L, 8.0 lmp.qt.)
Use either of the following.
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
Spark plug
Make
Gap
DENSO FK20HBR11
0.043 in. (1.1 mm)
NOTICE
■
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning engine.
6
411
6-1. Specifications
Battery
Open voltage* at
68
F (20
C):
Charging rates
12.6
12.8 V Fully charged
12.2
12.4 V Half charged
11.8
12.0 V Discharged
(*: Voltage checked 20 minutes after the engine and all the lights are turned off)
5 A max.
Oil capacity
Front
Rear
0.74 qt. (0.70 L, 0.61 lmp.qt.)
IS350:
1.42 qt. (1.35 L, 1.19 lmp.qt.)
IS250 (2WD models):
1.20 qt. (1.15 L, 1.01 lmp.qt.)
IS250 (AWD models):
1.10 qt. (1.05 L, 0.92 lmp.qt.)
Oil type and viscosity*
IS250 (AWD)
Hypoid gear oil API GL-5
Above 0
F (-18
C): SAE90
Below 0
F (-18
C): SAE80W or SAE80W-90
Others
“Toyota Genuine Differential
Gear Oil LT 75W-85 GL-5” or equivalent
*
: “Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT” is filled in your Lexus vehicle at factory fill. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT” or an equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
412
6-1. Specifications
Fluid capacity*
IS350
7.5 qt.
(7.1 L, 6.2 lmp.qt.)
IS250 (2WD)
7.5 qt.
(7.1 L, 6.2 lmp.qt.)
Toyota Genuine ATF WS
IS250 (AWD)
9.4 qt.
(8.9 L, 7.8 lmp.qt.)
Fluid type
*: The fluid capacity is provided as a reference. If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle.
Gear oil capacity
Gear oil type
Recommended gear oil viscosity
1.9 qt. (1.8 L, 1.6 Imp.qt.)
API GL-5
SAE75W-90
NOTICE
Using manual transmission gear oil other than “TOYOTA Genuine Manual
Transmission Gear Oil API GL-5” may cause occurrence of gear noise or other deterioration.
6
Clutch free play
Fluid type
0.2 0.6 in. (5 15 mm)
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
413
6-1. Specifications
Pedal clearance
*
1
IS 350
IS 250
Manual transmission
Automatic transmission
Pedal free play
Brake pad wear limit
Parking brake lining wear limit
Parking brake pedal travel lever travel
*
3
*
2
Pedal type
Lever type
/
4.13 in. (105 mm) Min.
4.09 in. (104 mm) Min.
4.3 in. (108 mm) Min.
0.04
0.08 in. (1.0
2.0 mm)
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
7 9 clicks
4 6 clicks
Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
*
1
: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 110 lbf (490 N, 50 kgf) while the engine is running.
*
2
: Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67.4 lbf (300 N,
30.6 kgf).
*
3
: Parking brake lever travel when pulled up with a force of 45.0 lbf (200 N, 20.4
kgf).
414
6-1. Specifications
Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
Type A
Tire size
Front and rear tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)
Wheel size
Wheel nut torque
205/55R16 89W, T125/70D17 98M
(spare)
Driving under normal conditions
Front:
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
or bar)*
Rear:
38 psi (260 kPa, 2.6 kgf/cm
2
or bar)*
Spare:
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
*: When driving at high speeds above 100 mph
(160 km/h), in countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 5.8 psi (40 kPa, 0.4 kgf/ cm
2
or bar) to the front tires and rear tires.
Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
16
7JJ, 17
4T (spare)
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
6
415
6-1. Specifications
Type B
Tire size
Front and rear tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)
Wheel size
Wheel nut torque
225/45R17 90W, 245/45R17 95W, T125/
70D17 98M (spare)
Driving under normal conditions
Front:
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
or bar)*
Rear:
38 psi (260 kPa, 2.6 kgf/cm
2
or bar)*
Spare:
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
*: When driving at high speeds above 100 mph
(160 km/h), in countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 4.5 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/ cm
2
or bar) to the front tires and rear tires.
Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
17
8JJ, 17
4T (spare)
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
416
6-1. Specifications
Type C
Tire size
Front and rear tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)
Wheel size
Wheel nut torque
225/45R17 91V, 225/45R17 91V, T125/
70D17 98M
Driving under normal conditions
Front:
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
or bar)*
Rear:
38 psi (260 kPa, 2.6 kgf/cm
2
or bar)*
Spare:
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
*: When driving at high speeds above 100 mph
(160 km/h), in countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 7.2 psi (50 kPa, 0.5 kgf/ cm
2
or bar) to the front tires and rear tires.
Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
17
8JJ, 17
4T (spare)
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
6
417
6-1. Specifications
Type D
Tire size
Front and rear tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)
Wheel size
Wheel nut torque
Front tires: 225/45R17 91V
Rear tires: 245/45R17 95V
Spare tire: T125/70R17 98M
Driving under normal conditions
Front:
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
or bar)*
Rear:
38 psi (260 kPa, 2.6 kgf/cm
2
or bar)*
Spare:
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
*: When driving at high speeds above 100 mph
(160 km/h), in countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 10 psi (70 kPa, 0.7 kgf/ cm
2
or bar) to the front tires and rear tires.
Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
17
8JJ, 17
4T (spare)
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
418
6-1. Specifications
Type E
Tire size
Front and rear tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)
Wheel size
Wheel nut torque
Front tires: 225/40R18 88Y
Rear tires: 255/40R18 95Y
Spare tire: T145/70R17 106M
Driving under normal conditions
Front:
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
or bar)*
Rear:
38 psi (260 kPa, 2.6 kgf/cm
2
or bar)*
Spare:
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
*: When driving at high speeds above 100 mph
(160 km/h), in countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 7.2 psi (50 kPa, 0.5 kgf/ cm
2
or bar) to the front tires and rear tires.
Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Front wheels: 18
8J
Rear wheels: 18
8 1/2J
Spare wheel: 17
4T
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
6
419
6-1. Specifications
Exterior
Vanity lights
Interior lights
Front
Rear
Interior
Overhead courtesy lights
Front
Rear
Door courtesy lights
*
: If equipped
A: D4S discharge bulbs
B: H11 halogen bulbs
C: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
D: HB3 halogen bulbs
E: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
F: HB4 halogen bulbs
G: Double end bulbs
420
Light Bulbs
Headlights
High beam
Low/high* beam (discharge bulbs)
Low beam* (halogen bulbs)
Front turn signal lights
Parking lights
Front fog lights
Trunk light
Rear turn signal lights
Back-up lights
Outer foot lights
Bulb No.
9005
D4S
H11
168
9006
7440
921
W
60
35
55
5
21
16
5
8
21
5
55
10
3.0
3.8
3.0
3.8
Type
E
E
G
E
E
C
E
F
D
A
B
E
G
E
G
E
6-1. Specifications
Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.
Premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 (Research Octane
Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine performance.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of
ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.
■
Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Lexus has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
■
If premium gasoline is not available
If 91 rating gasoline cannot be obtained, you may use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating as low as 87 (Research Octane Rating 91).
■
If your engine knocks
●
Consult your Lexus dealer.
●
You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
■
Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer.
6
421
6-1. Specifications
■
Gasoline quality standards
●
Automotive manufacturers in the US, Europe and Japan have developed a specification for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is expected to be applied worldwide.
●
The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels. In the US, category 4 has been adopted.
●
The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction through better performance.
■
Lexus recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
●
Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid build-up of engine deposits.
●
All gasoline sold in the US contains detergent additives to clean and/or keep clean intake systems.
■
Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many areas.
Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
■
Lexus does not recommend blended gasoline
●
Lexus allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate content is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE.
●
If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87.
●
Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
■
Lexus does not recommend gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service.
422
6-1. Specifications
NOTICE
■
Notice on gasoline quality
●
Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.
●
Do not use gasohol other than that stated here.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.
●
IS250: Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 91 may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage and should be corrected by refueling with higher octane unleaded gasoline.
●
IS350: Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 91 may result in engine knocking and significantly reduced performance. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage and should be corrected by refueling with higher octane unleaded gasoline.
■
Fuel-related poor driveability
If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.
■
When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.
6
423
6-1. Specifications
Typical tire symbols
Standard tire
Compact spare tire
424
Tire size
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Location of treadwear indicators
Tire ply composition and materials
(
(
(
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire.
6-1. Specifications
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is a bias-ply tire.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
(
(
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform tire quality grading” that follows.
Summer tire or all season tire (
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a summer tire.
“TEMPORARY USE ONLY” (
A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” molded into its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only.
6
425
6-1. Specifications
DOT symbol
*
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire manufacturer's identification mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer's optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*
: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
■
The illustration indicates typical tire size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 or 3 digits)
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)
426
■
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
6-1. Specifications
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the
U.S.A. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.
6
427
6-1. Specifications
■
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
■
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
■
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.
428
6-1. Specifications
■
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Tire related term
Accessory weight
Cold tire inflation pressure
Curb weight
Meaning
The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not)
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine
6
429
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Maximum inflation pressure
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
Normal occupant weight
Production options weight
Vehicle capacity weight
(Total load capacity)
Occupant distribution
Recommended inflation pressure
Rim
Meaning
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1
*
that follows
The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1
*
below
Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer.
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter)
Rim size designation
Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim type designation
Rim diameter and width
The industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by style or code
430
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Rim width
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Meaning
Nominal distance between rim flanges
The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two
Vehicle normal load on the tire
Weather side
The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1
*
below), and dividing it by two
The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire
6
431
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Bead
Bead separation
Bias ply tire
Carcass
Chunking
Cord
Cord separation
Cracking
CT
Extra load tire
Groove
Innerliner
Innerliner separation
432
Meaning
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim
A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load
The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall
The strands forming the plies in the tire
The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds
Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire
The space between two adjacent tread ribs
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire
The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass
6-1. Specifications
Maximum load rating
Maximum permissible inflation pressure
Measuring rim
Open splice
Outer diameter
Ply
Tire related term
Intended outboard sidewall
Light truck (LT) tire
Load rating
Overall width
Passenger car tire
Meaning
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle
A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles
The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure
The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated
The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements
Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material
The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10000 lb. or less.
A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
433
6
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Ply separation
Pneumatic tire
Radial ply tire
Reinforced tire
Section width
Sidewall
Sidewall separation
Snow tire
Test rim
Meaning
A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands
That portion of a tire between the tread and bead
The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard
Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test
Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a
Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( on at least one sidewall
)
The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire
434
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Tread
Tread rib
Tread separation
Treadwear indicators
(TWI)
Meaning
That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road
A tread section running circumferentially around a tire
Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing
*
:Table 1
Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities
Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants
2 through 4
5 through 10
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
2
3
Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle
11 through 15
16 through 20
5
7
2 in front
2 in front, 1 in second seat
2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat
2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat
6
435
6-2. Customization
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences requires specialized equipment and may be performed by an authorized Lexus dealership.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
(
Item
Smart access system with push-button start
(
Wireless remote control
Function Default setting
Customized setting
Smart access system with push-button start
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers)
Operation signal
(Buzzer)
Wireless remote control
Unlocking operation
On
On
On
On
Driver's door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps
Automatic door lock function to be activated if door is not opened after being unlocked
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
All doors unlocked in one step
Off
436
6-2. Customization
Item
Wireless remote control
(
Function
Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is activated if door is not opened after being unlocked
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers)
Operation signal
(Buzzer)
Trunk unlocking function
Default setting
60 seconds
On
On
On
Trunk unlocking operation Push and hold
Panic function On
Customized setting
30 seconds
120 seconds
Off
Off
Off
Push twice
One short push
Off
6
437
6-2. Customization
Item
Door lock
(
Function
Unlocking using a key
Speed-detecting automatic door lock function
(Manual transmissions)
Speed-detecting automatic door lock function
(Automatic transmissions)
Opening driver's door unlocks all doors (Manual transmissions)
Opening driver's door unlocks all doors (Automatic transmissions)
Shifting gears to P unlocks all doors.
Shifting gears to position other than P locks all doors.
Default setting
Customized setting
Driver's door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps
All doors unlocked in one step
On
Off
On
Off
On
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Off
438
6-2. Customization
(
(
Item
Power windows
Moon roof
Automatic light control system
(
Function Default setting
Linked door lock operation
Linked door key operation
Wireless remote control linked operation
Linked door lock operation
Linked door key operation
Linked operation of components when door key is used
Wireless remote control linked operation
Linked operation of components when wireless remote control used
Light sensor sensitivity
Time elapsed before headlights automatically turn off after doors are closed
On
Open and close
On
On
Open and close
Slide only
On
Slide only
Level 3
30 seconds
Customized setting
Off
Open only
Close only
Off
Off
Open only
Close only
Tilt only
Off
Tilt only
Level 1 to 5
0 seconds
60 seconds
90 seconds
6
439
6-2. Customization
Item Function Default setting
(
(
Windshield wipers and washer
Intuitive parking assist
(
Illumination
Switching operation when the vehicle is stationary
Drip prevention function
On
Time elapsed before the drip prevention function operates
On
Variable depending on the vehicle speed
Back sensor operation display and buzzer
Buzzer volume
Distance which a sensor detects
Time elapsed before lights turn off
Operation when the doors are unlocked
Operation after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch turned OFF
Front foot well lighting
Shift lever lighting
Outer foot light
On
Level 3
150 cm (4.9 ft.)
15 seconds
On
On
On
On
On
Customized setting
Off
Off
3 seconds
Off
Level 1 to 5
60 cm (2.0 ft.)
7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Canada
Country
440
Available language
English and French
6-3. Initialization
The following item must be initialized for normal system operation in cases such as after the battery is reconnected, or maintenance is performed on the vehicle.
Item
Power window
When to initialize
After reconnecting or changing the battery
Engine oil maintenance data
After changing engine oil
Tire pressure warning system
• When rotating the tires differing with front and rear tire inflation pressures.
• When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed.
• When changing the tire size.
Reference
6
441
6-3. Initialization
442
7
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners..................... 444
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners
(in French) ............................. 445
443
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Tollfree: 1-800-25-LEXUS).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or
Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov
; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov
.
444
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.
Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité
●
Déroulez la sangle diagonale de telle sorte qu'elle passe bien sur l'épaule, sans pour autant être en contact avec votre cou ou glisser de votre épaule.
●
Placez la sangle abdominale le plus bas possible sur les hanches.
●
Réglez la position du dossier de siège. Asseyez-vous le dos le plus droit possible et calez-vous bien dans le siège.
●
Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de sécurité.
Guide de confort de ceinture de sécurité (sièges arrière extérieurs)
Si la sangle diagonale est proche du cou de la personne, faites coulisser le guide de confort de ceinture de sécurité vers l'avant.
7
445
Entretien et soin
■
Ceintures de sécurité
Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d'eau savonneuse tiède.
Profitez de l'occasion pour vérifier régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas effilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées.
ATTENTION
■
Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité
Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu'elles ne sont pas entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas desserrés. N'utilisez pas une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu'elle ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse n'apporte aucune garantie de protection de l'occupant en cas d'accident.
446
Abbreviation list .................... 448
Alphabetical index................. 450
What to do if... ....................... 462
For details of equipment related to the navigation system, such as the audio system, refer to the “Navigation System
Owner's Manual”.
447
Abbreviation list
I/M
INT
MMT
M + S
MTBE
OBD
PCS
SRS
TIN
TPMS
TRAC
448
DISP
ECT
ECU
EDR
ELR
EPS
ETCS
GAWR
ABBREVIATIONS
ABS
AFS
AI-SHIFT
ALR
CAL
CRS
MEANING
Anti-Lock Brake System
Adaptive Front-lighting System
Artificial Intelligence Shift
Automatic Locking Retractor
Calibration
Child Restraint System
Display
Electronic Controlled Transmission
Electronic Control Unit
Event data recorder
Emergency Locking Retractor
Electric Power Steering
Electronic Throttle Control System
Gross Axle Weight Rating
Emission inspection and maintenance
Intermittent
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
Mud and Snow
Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether
On Board Diagnostics
Pre-Collision System
Supplemental Restraint System
Tire Identification Number
Tire Pressure Warning System
Traction Control
Abbreviation list
ABBREVIATIONS
VDIM
VIN
VSC
MEANING
Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management
Vehicle Identification Number
Vehicle Stability Control
449
Alphabetical index
A
A/C ............................................................. 192
ABS.............................................................. 170
AFS .............................................................. 144
Adaptive front lighting system ......... 144
Air conditioning filter ..........................322
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter ....................... 322
Automatic air conditioning
system....................................................192
Airbags
Airbag operating conditions.............81
Airbag precautions for your
child..........................................................85
Airbag warning light ..........................361
Curtain shield airbag operating
conditions.............................................. 82
Curtain shield airbag
precautions ..........................................85
Front passenger occupant
classification system.........................90
General airbag precautions ...........85
Locations of airbags............................ 79
Modification and disposal of
airbags....................................................89
Proper driving posture ............. 77, 85
Side airbag operating
conditions.............................................. 82
Side airbag precautions....................85
SRS airbags ............................................. 79
Alarm.............................................................74
Antenna....................................................208
Anti-lock brake system........................170
Armrest ....................................................255
Ashtrays....................................................248
Audio input..............................................228
Audio system
Antenna..................................................208
Audio input........................................... 228
AUX adapter...................................... 228
CD player/changer.............................211
MP3/WMA disc..................................217
Optimal use ..........................................225
Portable music player..................... 228
Radio ....................................................... 204
Steering wheel audio switch.........229
Automatic air conditioning
system ......................................................192
Automatic headlight leveling
system ......................................................145
Automatic light control system.........143
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission ....................122
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P....................................392
S mode ..................................................... 124
AUX adapter.........................................228
450
Alphabetical index
B
Back-up lights
Wattage ................................................. 420
Battery
Checking...............................................302
If the vehicle has discharged
battery.................................................. 397
Preparing and checking
before winter......................................183
Bottle holders ..........................................241
Brake
Fluid............................................................301
Parking brake........................................129
Brake assist...............................................170
C
Care
Exterior....................................................274
Interior......................................................277
Seat belts ............................................... 278
Cargo capacity ....................................... 179
Cargo hooks............................................261
CD changer ...............................................211
CD player....................................................211
Chains.........................................................183
Child restraint system
Booster seats, definition.................... 95
Booster seats, installation................. 99
Convertible seats, definition ........... 95
Convertible seats, installation ........ 99
Front passenger occupant
classification system.........................90
Infant seats, definition..........................95
Infant seats, installation.......................99
Installing CRS with lower
anchorages......................................... 102
Installing CRS with seat belts..........99
Installing CRS with top straps.......103
Child safety
Airbag precautions............................. 85
Battery precautions .............304, 399
Child restraint system.........................95
Child-protectors ...................................38
How your child should wear
the seat belt ..........................................55
Installing child restraints.....................98
Moon roof precautions......................68
Power window lock switch..............64
Power window precautions ............65
Removed electronic key battery
precautions........................................326
Seat belt comfort guide .....................53
Seat belt extender precautions......57
Seat belt precautions ..........................56
Seat heater precautions......252, 254
Trunk precautions.................................43
Child-protectors......................................38
Cigarette lighter....................................249
451
Alphabetical index
Cleaning
Exterior ....................................................274
Interior......................................................277
Seat belts................................................278
Clock .........................................................244
Coat hooks..............................................259
Compass ..................................................269
Condenser ...............................................301
Console box ...........................................237
Cooling system
Engine overheating ......................... 400
Cornering assist sensors .................... 164
Cruise control
Cruise control .......................................152
Dynamic radar cruise control ...... 155
Cup holder ..............................................239
Curtain shield airbags............................ 79
Customizable features .......................436
D
Daytime running light system............144
Defogger
Rear window .......................................200
Side mirror............................................200
Dimension ...............................................406
Dinghy towing...............................188, 189
Display
Dynamic radar cruise control.......155
Satellite switch mode....................... 245
Trip information....................................140
Warning message............................ 369
Do-it-yourself maintenance.............286
Door courtesy lights
Door courtesy lights.......................... 231
Wattage................................................. 420
Door pockets ...........................................241
Doors
Door glasses............................................64
Door lock .................................22, 34, 37
Side mirrors............................................... 61
Driver's seat belt reminder light..... 362
Driving
Correct posture..................................... 77
Procedures.............................................108
Driving position memory...................... 46
452
Alphabetical index
E
Electric power steering .......................170
Electronic key
If the electronic key does not
operate properly............................ 394
Emergency, in case of
If the engine will not start.................391
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P................................... 392
If the vehicle has discharged
battery.................................................. 397
If the warning buzzer sounds......360
If the warning light turns on..........360
If the warning message is
displayed............................................369
If you have a flat tire ........................382
If you lose your keys ........................393
If you think something is
wrong...................................................356
If the electronic key does not
operate properly............................ 394
If your vehicle becomes stuck .... 402
If your vehicle needs to be
towed...................................................350
If your vehicle overheats................400
Engine
Compartment......................................292
Engine switch.......................................... 117
Hood....................................................... 289
How to start the engine..................... 117
Identification number.......................407
If the engine will not start................. 391
Ignition switch......................................... 117
Overheating........................................400
Engine compartment cover .............294
Engine coolant
Capacity .................................................... 411
Checking ...............................................299
Preparing and checking
before winter .....................................183
Engine coolant temperature
gauge.......................................................130
Engine immobilizer system.................. 72
Engine oil
Capacity ..................................................410
Checking ...............................................295
Preparing and checking
before winter .....................................183
Engine oil maintenance data............298
EPS .............................................................. 170
Event data recorder ........................... 358
453
Alphabetical index
F
First-aid kit storage belt ...................... 261
Floor mat ..................................................260
Fluid
Brake......................................................... 301
Washer...................................................305
Fog lights
Switch ........................................................146
Wattage..................................................420
Foot well lighting.................................... 231
Front fog lights
Switch ........................................................146
Wattage..................................................420
Front passenger occupant
classification system ............................90
Front passenger's seat belt
reminder light......................................362
Front seats
Adjustment............................................... 44
Driving position memory.................. 46
Seat position memory........................ 49
Front turn signal lights
Switch........................................................128
Wattage................................................. 420
Fuel
Capacity ................................................409
Fuel gauge..............................................130
Fuel pump shut off system.............357
Gas station information ................. 464
Information ............................................. 421
Refueling....................................................69
Fuel door..................................................... 69
Fuel filler door........................................... 69
Fuel pump shut off system................. 357
Fuses.......................................................... 327
G
Garage door opener.......................... 264
Gas station information ..................... 464
Gauges...................................................... 130
Glove box................................................ 236
Glove box light...................................... 237
454
Alphabetical index
H
Head restraints
Adjusting ...................................................51
Headlight aim ..........................................341
Headlight cleaner ................................... 151
Headlights
Discharge headlights
precautions .......................................348
Replacing light bulbs ....................... 342
Switch........................................................143
Wattage ................................................. 420
Heaters
Seat heaters................................251, 253
Side mirror............................................200
Hill-start assist control .........................170
Hood ......................................................... 289
Hooks
Cargo........................................................261
Coat ......................................................... 259
Shopping bag........................................261
I
I/M test......................................................285
Identification
Engine......................................................407
Vehicle ....................................................407
Ignition switch............................................117
Illuminated entry system ....................233
Indicator lights......................................... 136
Initialization
Items to initialize ...................................441
Inside rear view mirror ..........................60
Interior lights
Interior lights...........................................231
Switch.......................................................234
Wattage..................................................420
J
Jack
Positioning a floor jack................... 290
Replacing the wheel.........................382
Jack handle..............................................382
455
Alphabetical index
K
Keyless entry..............................................34
Keys
Electronic key......................................... 20
Engine switch...........................................117
If you lose your keys.........................393
If the electronic key does not
operate properly............................394
Key number............................................. 20
Keyless entry........................................... 34
Keys............................................................. 20
Mechanical key...................................... 20
Wireless remote control key.......... 34
L
Light bulbs
Replacing............................................... 342
Wattage..................................................420
Lights
Door courtesy lights...........................231
Fog light switch.....................................146
Headlights switch ................................143
Interior light switch............................ 234
Outer foot lights...................................231
Overhead courtesy light..................231
Personal light switch ........................ 234
Replacing light bulbs........................ 342
Scuff lighting...........................................231
Shift lever lighting ................................231
Turn signal lever...................................128
Vanity lights.......................................... 243
Wattage..................................................420
Load capacity..........................................182
M
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance......... 286
General maintenance..................... 282
Maintenance data.............................406
Maintenance requirements..........280
Manual transmission .............................126
Meter
Instrument panel light control.........131
Meters.......................................................130
Micro dust and pollen filter ................196
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror ...................... 60
Side mirror heater.............................200
Side mirrors............................................... 61
Vanity mirrors......................................243
Moon roof................................................... 66
MP3 disc....................................................217
Multi-information display....................139
O
Odometer ................................................ 130
Oil
Engine oil............................................... 295
Opener
Fuel filler door.........................................69
Hood ....................................................... 289
Trunk..............................................................41
Outer foot lights
Outer foot lights................................... 231
Wattage................................................. 420
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjusting and folding........................... 61
Mirror position memory....................46
Outside temperature display ........... 140
Overhead console...............................238
456
Alphabetical index
Overhead courtesy lights
Overhead courtesy lights ............... 231
Wattage ................................................. 420
Overheating, Engine..........................400
P
Parking assist sensors ..........................164
Parking brake ..........................................129
Parking lights
Replacing light bulbs ....................... 342
Switch........................................................143
Wattage ................................................. 420
PCS.............................................................. 176
Personal lights
Switch...................................................... 234
Power outlet........................................... 250
Power windows.........................................64
Pre-collision system.............................. 176
R
Radar cruise control .............................155
Radiator......................................................301
Radio ......................................................... 204
RDS............................................................ 205
Rear sunshade....................................... 256
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs ....................... 342
Wattage ................................................. 420
Rear view mirror
Compass............................................... 269
Rear window defogger......................200
Replacing
Electronic key battery ..................... 325
Fuses.........................................................327
Light bulbs ............................................ 342
Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners ..........................................444
S
Scuff lighting ............................................ 231
Seat belts
Adjusting the seat belt........................53
Automatic locking retractor............54
Child restraint system
installation..............................................98
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belts.....................................278
Emergency locking retractor..........54
How to wear your seat belt.............52
How your child should wear
the seat belt ..........................................55
Pregnant women,
proper seat belt use.........................54
Reminder light .....................................362
Seat belt extenders ..............................55
Seat belt pretensioners ......................53
Seat heaters ..................................251, 253
Seat position memory............................49
Seat ventilators ......................................253
Seating capacity..................................... 182
Seats
Adjustment...............................................44
Adjustment precautions....................45
Child seats/child restraint
system installation..............................98
Cleaning................................................. 277
Driver’s seat position memory.......46
Front passenger seat position
memory..................................................49
Head restraint...........................................51
Properly sitting in the seat .................77
Seat heaters ............................... 251, 253
Ventilated seats ..................................253
Service reminder indicators ............. 136
457
Alphabetical index
Shift lever
Automatic transmission....................122
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P...................................392
Manual transmission..........................126
Shift lever lighting .................................. 231
Shift lock system....................................392
Shopping bag hooks............................. 261
Side airbags................................................ 79
Side marker lights
Switch ........................................................143
Side mirror
Adjusting and folding ...........................61
Mirror position memory ................... 46
Smart access system with push-button start
Entry function...........................................22
Starting the engine................................117
Spare tire
Inflation pressure..................................316
Spare tire................................................382
Spark plug...................................................411
Specifications .........................................406
Speech command switch*
Speedometer
Speed indicator ................................... 130
Speedometer........................................ 130
Steering wheel
Audio switches....................................229
Manual adjustment.............................. 58
Power adjustment................................ 59
Steering wheel position
memory ..................................................46
Storage feature ..................................... 236
Stuck
If your vehicle becomes stuck .... 402
Sun visors................................................. 242
Sunshade
Rear.......................................................... 256
Roof..............................................................67
Switch
ECT switch............................................. 123
Engine switch.......................................... 117
ETCS switch.......................................... 126
Fog light switch ....................................146
Ignition switch ......................................... 117
Light switches........................................ 143
Power door lock switch.....................37
Power window switch ........................64
Satellite switches................................ 245
Transmission shift switches ............ 124
Window lock switch............................64
Wipers and washer switch............. 147
458
Alphabetical index
T
Tachometer
Tacho indicator ....................................130
Tachometer............................................130
Tail lights
Switch........................................................143
Talk switch*
Telephone switch*
Theft deterrent system
Alarm...........................................................74
Engine immobilizer system..............72
Theft prevention labels ..........................76
Tire inflation pressure...........................316
Tire information
Glossary ................................................ 429
Size ........................................................... 426
Tire identification number............. 426
Uniform tire quality grading..........427
Tires
Chains.......................................................183
Checking...............................................306
If you have a flat tire..........................382
Inflation pressure .................................316
Inflation pressure sensor................308
Information.............................................424
Replacing...............................................382
Rotating tires........................................306
Size .............................................................415
Snow tires................................................183
Tools .......................................................... 382
Total load capacity.................................182
Towing
Dinghy towing ...........................188, 189
Emergency towing...........................350
Trailer towing........................................ 187
TRAC.......................................................... 170
Traction control...................................... 170
Transmission shift switches................ 124
Trip meter .................................................130
Trunk
Extending a space............................ 258
Opener ........................................................41
Trunk light
Trunk light................................................. 42
Wattage..................................................420
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs........................342
Switch........................................................ 128
Wattage..................................................420
*: Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”
459
Alphabetical index
V
Vanity lights
Vanity lights.......................................... 243
Wattage..................................................420
Vanity mirrors ........................................243
VDIM.......................................................... 170
Vehicle dynamics integrated
management ........................................ 170
Vehicle identification number.........407
Vehicle stability control....................... 170
Ventilators ...............................................253
VSC............................................................. 170
W
Warning buzzers
Brake system .......................................360
Open door ..........................................362
Seat belt reminder.............................362
Warning lights
Anti-lock brake system.....................361
Brake assist system.............................361
Brake system .......................................360
Charging system .................................361
Electric power steering
warning light.......................................361
Low fuel level.......................................362
Malfunction indicator lamp.............361
Master warning light........................362
Open door ...........................................362
Pre-collision system...........................361
Pretensioners.........................................361
Seat belt reminder light ..................362
SRS airbags ............................................361
Tire pressure warning
light........................................................362
Warning messages
AWD system....................................... 370
Dynamic radar
cruise control....................... 370, 373
Engine oil level.....................................373
Engine oil maintenance...................373
Engine oil pressure........................... 369
Hill-start assist control .....................372
Hood ........................................................373
Intuitive parking assist ......... 370, 373
Moon roof..............................................373
Open door............................................373
Parking brake.......................................373
Pre-collision system............. 370, 373
Smart access system with
push-button start ........................... 378
Steering lock........................................ 370
Tire pressure
warning system................... 370, 373
Traction control...................................372
Trunk.........................................................373
Vehicle stability control...................372
Washer fluid .........................................373
Washer
Checking...............................................305
Preparing and checking
before winter......................................183
Switch........................................................ 147
Washing and waxing............................274
Weight
Cargo capacity .................................... 179
Load limits...............................................182
Weight....................................................406
460
Wheels ..................................................... 320
Window glasses .......................................64
Window lock switch................................64
Windows
Power windows .....................................64
Rear window defogger..................200
Washer..................................................... 147
Windshield wipers................................. 147
Wireless remote control key
Replacing the battery ...................... 325
WMA disc................................................. 217
Alphabetical index
461
What to do if...
A tire punctures
If you have a flat tire
The engine does not start
If the engine will not start
Engine immobilizer system
If the vehicle battery is discharged
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
The shift lever cannot be moved out
The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone
If your vehicle overheats
Steam can be seen coming from under the hood
The key is lost
If you lose your keys
The battery runs out
If the vehicle battery is discharged
The doors cannot be locked
Doors
The horn begins to sound
Alarm
The vehicle is stuck in mud or sand
If the vehicle becomes stuck
462
What to do if...
The warning light or indicator light comes on
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...
■ Warning lights
Brake system warning light or
“ABS” warning light
or
Low fuel level warning light
SRS warning light
Open door warning light
Charging system warning light
The warning message is displayed or
Malfunction indicator lamp
Driver’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Master warning light
Electric power steering warning light
Pre-collision system warning light
Low tire pressure warning light
If the warning message is displayed
463
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever
Trunk opener
Fuel filler door
464
Hood lock release lever
Fuel filler door opener
Tire inflation pressure
Fuel tank capacity
Fuel type
Cold tire inflation pressure
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill)
Engine oil type
17.2 gal. (65 L, 14.3 lmp.gal.)
Unleaded gasoline only
IS250 IS250
(2WD models) (AWD models)
With filter 6.6 (6.3, 5.5)
Without filter 6.2 (5.9
,
5.2
) qt. (L, Imp.qt.)
IS350
6.8 (6.4, 5.7) 6.6 (6.3, 5.5)
6.3 (6.0, 5.3) 6.2 (5.9
,
5.2
)
Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended oil viscosity: SAE 5W-30
* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project